JP7467833B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that changes the display of pictures on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the display of changing pictures begins. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed as a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2002-78904 A

In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the attention given to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention given to games.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

The present invention relates to
A ball entry means provided in the game area;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a determination means for determining whether to grant a special benefit to a player based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A means for granting a bonus to a player based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A means for performing the game operation, counting a time when the game operation is started and a notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the judgment means is reached, and the game operation is ended as one game operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific notification means capable of executing a specific notification by a predetermined notification means;
A means for setting a notification mode of the specific notification in accordance with specific information and an expected degree of acquisition of the special benefit ;
A means for setting the specific information to first information upon a predetermined trigger;
a means for setting the specific information to second information different from the first information upon a predetermined trigger;
Equipped with
A configuration capable of differentiating the notification mode of the specific notification set when the specific information is the first information and when the specific information is the second information even if the expected degree of obtaining the privilege is the same, and a configuration capable of differentiating the notification mode of the specific notification when the expected degree of obtaining the privilege is different even if the specific information is the same information,
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the vehicle enters a predetermined state in which a condition for executing the specific notification can be satisfied,
In the predetermined state, when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the awarding of the benefit and the execution condition is satisfied, the specific notification can be executed;
The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with a means for making a notification corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined state, thereby enabling the player to understand that the predetermined state has occurred.

The present invention can effectively increase attention to the game.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2A is a front view showing the configuration of the game board, and FIG. 2B is a front view of the main display unit. A front view of the upper variable winning device. FIG. 2 is a front view of the ball entry unit. (a) is a front oblique view of the right-side operating ball entry section, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the passage structure related to the right-side operating ball entry section. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between passage length and time required for passage. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the lower operating port. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a hit/miss table for the right operating port. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a lower operating port, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a right operating port. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a control process for a lower operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for starting fluctuation for the lower operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a control process for a right operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process for the right operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. A flowchart showing the large prize opening and closing process. 11 is a flowchart showing a first opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for power supply support. 13 is a schematic diagram comparing the variable display time and fixed display time for each support mode. 13 is a flowchart showing an electric utility switching process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display time setting process for a lower operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display time setting process for the right operating port. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the differences in variable display time and fixed display time for each game state. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the differences in variable display time and fixed display time for each game state. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the differences in variable display time and fixed display time for each game state. FIG. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot result and the number of times the high-frequency support mode continues. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating the movement of a gaming ball during a second normal gaming state and a fourth normal gaming state. FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating the movement of a gaming ball during a third normal gaming state. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating the movement of a gaming ball during a third normal gaming state. 13 is a timing chart showing the increase and decrease of balls held as the game progresses. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device and the display control device. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of a pattern on a display screen. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a pattern displayed on a display screen. 13 is a flowchart showing variable display control processing for the second/third normal game states in the MPU of the notification/presentation control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a symbol combination that is displayed in a stopped state in the second/third normal game state. FIG. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the variable display time for a game involving the right operating port during the second/third normal game state. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting value and the probability of losing in the second/third normal game state, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing an example of a character display on the display screen. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between effect size and high setting expectation, (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between actual miss probability and effect size. 13 is a flowchart showing the first preparation process for updating related displays in the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing for starting a presentation for a game in the MPU of the notification/presentation control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the first update process for related displays in the MPU of the notification/performance control device. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect update flow. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect update flow. 13 is a flowchart showing a second preparation process for updating related displays in the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the second update process for the related display in the MPU of the notification/performance control device. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game status and whether or not an effect can be updated; FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing an example of the flow of effect updates as the game progresses. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for starting a change corresponding to the first normal game state executed by the MPU of the notification/presentation control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing preparation processing for special effects. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the effect level and the probability of winning a special effect, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the difference in display mode depending on whether or not a special effect flag is present. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting value for each effect level and the selection ratio. FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of special effects. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of special effects.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 seen from the front side, and Figures 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded form. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the components within the play area PE of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 2.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a main machine part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is made of plate material connected on all four sides, forming a rectangular frame. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island equipment of the game hall.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a state in which it can be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to the connection between the upper frame section and the left frame section of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 18 is provided at the connection between the lower frame section and the left frame section of the outer frame 11. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism, which allows the gaming machine main section 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 (see Figures 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main part 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported rotatably relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front (see Figure 3).

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in Fig. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an outer shape substantially identical to that of the outer frame 11, and covers substantially the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the center of the frame body 20 so that substantially the entire play area PE, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front, and the window portion 21 is blocked from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition that separates the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear, and the two glass panels 23 face each other from the front and rear with the partition in between. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the playing area PE is doubly covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

It is not necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be attached individually to the frame body 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one, or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ multiple glass panels and have each glass panel face each other at a specified gap from the front to the back. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a panel member made of a transparent synthetic resin instead of the glass panels.

As shown in FIG. 1, various light emitting means such as lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window section 21). For example, a circular illumination section 26 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The circular illumination section 26 lights up or blinks in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified reach is reached. In addition, an error display lamp section 27 that lights up in the event of a specified error is provided at the center of the circular illumination section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and prize ball lamp sections 28 that light up while prize balls are being paid out are provided on the left and right sides of the error display lamp section 27. In addition, speaker sections 29 that output sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28.

Below the window 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 that bulge toward the front are arranged side by side. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 32. The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device described below, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described below while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 34 has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided to the right of the lower bulge 32 so as to protrude forward. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described below.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage that leads to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage that leads to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at the upper corner, and the receiving portion is divided into left and right by a partition wall to define an entrance portion of the front door side upper tray passage and an entrance portion of the front door side lower tray passage. Game balls that enter the front door side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls that enter the front door side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

The front door frame 14 has protruding shafts at its upper and lower ends on the rear side of the pivot base end. These protruding shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hooks 49 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the rear side of the front door frame 14 on the pivot tip end side. These hooks 49 form a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

(Inner frame 13)
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 2 and Fig. 3. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50 having an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape similar to that of the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The resin base 50 is disposed close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A fascia is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The fascia is disposed below the resin base 50 (specifically, its lower end portion), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 is placed on the fascia.

Support brackets 51, 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front of the resin base 50 on the rotation base side. Axle holes are formed in the support brackets 51, 52, and the protruding shafts of the front door frame 14 are inserted into these axle holes, so that the front door frame 14 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13.

The front of the resin base 50 has an insertion hole at the tip of the rotation for inserting the hook fittings 49 provided on the back of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG. 3, in this pachinko machine 10, the locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden and arranged on the back side of the inner frame 13. Therefore, the hook fittings 49 are engaged with the locking device 55 (more specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole, so that the front door frame 14 is locked so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame 13. The locking device 55 also has an inner frame hook member 57 that extends rearward from the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 57 are hooked onto the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11, so that the main part 12 of the gaming machine is locked in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed in the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55, and the locking device 55 is configured so that when a key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and when the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the left, the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A roughly elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the center of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is blocked from the rear by the game board 60 attached to the resin base 50. The game board 60 is made of wooden plywood and a sheet material that covers the front surface of the plywood, and its front surface is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. A game area PE where game balls flow down is formed in this exposed area, i.e., the front surface of the game board 60. The game board 60 is not limited to being made of wood, and can also be made of synthetic resin.

The game board 60 (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE) will be described below with reference to Figure 4. Figure 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game Board 60)
A plurality of openings of various sizes are formed in the game board 60, penetrating in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the game board. A general winning opening 61, operational winning sections 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, etc. are disposed in each opening. When a ball enters an entry section such as the general winning opening 61, the operational winning sections 62, 63, or the variable winning devices 64, 65, it is detected by a detection sensor, and a privilege such as the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is given to the player based on the detection result.

Specifically, if a ball enters the general winning hole 61, 10 game balls are paid out, if a ball enters the lower operating ball entry section 62, 4 game balls are paid out, if a ball enters the right operating ball entry section 63, 1 game ball is paid out, if a ball enters the upper variable winning device 64, 14 game balls are paid out, and if a ball enters the lower variable winning device 65, 10 game balls are paid out.

At the bottom of the game board 60, an outlet 68 is provided, and game balls that do not enter the various entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 68. Here, "entering" means that the game ball passes through a specified opening position, and includes not only the situation in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening position, but also the situation in which the game ball is not discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening position. In the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 68, balls entering the general winning port 61, the operating winning sections 62, 63, the variable winning devices 64, 65, and the through gate 66 are also referred to as winning.

The game board 60 is also provided with numerous nails 69 to appropriately distribute and adjust the path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged on it. These nails 69, windmills, and other components differentiate the path of the game balls, and are adjusted so that the probability of winning the general winning hole 61 and the like described above is appropriate.

The variable display unit 67 is disposed in the center of the game board 60, and the above-mentioned operating ball entry sections 62, 63, etc. are disposed around the variable display unit 67. The operating ball entry sections 62, 63 are broadly divided into a lower operating ball entry section 62 disposed below the variable display unit 67 and a right operating ball entry section 63 disposed to the right of the variable display unit 67. In particular, the right operating ball entry section 63 is provided with an electric device 71 as an opening/closing type ball entry assistance device (ball entry assistance means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric device 71 has a shutter and a solenoid-type drive section that drives the shutter, and the position of the shutter can be changed by the drive section to switch between an open state (accepting state) in which a ball can be entered into the right operating ball entry section 63 (right operating port 63a) and a closed state (non-accepting state) in which the ball cannot be entered. In addition, the electric device 71 attached to the right-side ball entry section 63 may be switchable between a state in which it is easy to enter the right opening 63a and a state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball.

The through gate 66 is disposed in the play area PE (the right route described later in detail) upstream of the right-side actuated ball entry section 63, more specifically, to the side (right) of the variable display unit 67. The through gate 66 allows game balls to pass in the vertical direction, and game balls that enter the through gate 66 flow downstream in the play area PE without being ejected from the play area PE. If a lottery is won, triggered by the game ball passing through the through gate 66, the electric device 71 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

The upper variable winning device 64 is disposed at a position between the through gate 66 and the right-side operating ball entry section 63 on the right route. The upper variable winning device 64 is formed with an upper large winning opening into which multiple game balls can enter at the same time, and is provided with an opening/closing mechanism as an opening/closing means for opening and closing the upper large winning opening. The opening/closing mechanism has a shutter as an opening/closing member for the large winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (assistance state or acceptance state) in which game balls can or can be easily entered, and a closed state (non-assistance state or non-acceptance state) in which game balls can or cannot be entered. The shutter is also connected to a variable winning drive section (more specifically, a solenoid), and is normally maintained in a closed state, and is switched to an open state when the internal lottery results in a transition to an opening/closing execution mode (special game state or opening/closing execution state).

The lower variable winning device 65 is disposed at a position downstream of the right-side active ball entry section 63 on the right route. The lower variable winning device 65 is formed with a lower large winning opening into which multiple game balls can enter at the same time, and is provided with an opening/closing mechanism as an opening/closing means for opening and closing the lower large winning opening. The opening/closing mechanism has a shutter as an opening/closing member for the large winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (accepting state) in which game balls can enter and a closed state (non-accepting state) in which game balls cannot enter. The shutter is also connected to a variable winning drive section (more specifically, a solenoid), and is normally maintained in a closed state, and is switched to an open state when the internal lottery results in a transition to an opening/closing execution mode (special game state or opening/closing execution state).

The opening and closing execution mode is a mode to which the mode is switched in the event of a big win or special win. In the opening and closing execution mode, the variable winning device 65 is opened in such a way that, for example, the passage of a predetermined period of time (30 sec or 0.8 sec in this embodiment) or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes (9 prizes in this embodiment) constitutes one round, and the shutter is set to open up to a predetermined number of rounds (1, 2, 6, 8, or 16 rounds in this embodiment).

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 has a pattern display device 75 that variably displays (fluctuates) patterns when a winning ball enters the active ball entry sections 62, 63 as a trigger.

The pattern display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display contents on the display screen 75a are controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, patterns are displayed, for example, lined up on the left, center, and right, and these patterns are displayed in a variable manner by scrolling vertically. When a jackpot or special win occurs, a predetermined combination of patterns is displayed stationary on a preset pay line, and the game transitions to the opening and closing execution mode. Note that the pattern display device 75 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

In addition, a center frame 76 is disposed in the variable display unit 67 so as to surround the symbol display device 75. The center frame 76 is fixed to the front side of the game board 60, and in this fixed state, it stands up from the front of the game board 60, so that the gap dimension between the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the game area PE from colliding with the symbol display device 75, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is roughly divided into the right route that bypasses the variable display unit 67 (more specifically, the center frame 76) from the right side, and the left route that bypasses it from the left side.

The above-mentioned right-side operating ball entry section 63, variable entry devices 64, 65, and through gate 66 are arranged on the right route, and game balls flowing down the left route are prevented from entering the right-side operating ball entry section 63, variable entry devices 64, 65, and through gate 66. On the other hand, the lower operating ball entry section 62 is arranged on the left route, and game balls flowing down the right route are prevented from entering the lower operating ball entry section 62. By selecting the right or left route as the destination of the game ball (path along which the game ball flows) depending on the game situation, the player can play advantageously.

A main display unit 81 is disposed on the protective member for the guide rail 100 disposed outside the play area PE. The front surface of the main display unit 81 faces the glass unit 22 (more specifically, the rear glass panel 23) that allows the play area PE to be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the facing portion is provided with a main display section D on which a predetermined image or the like is displayed. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section D is configured to be controlled by the main control device.

The main display section D has a lower operating port display section DL that displays the lottery results based on winning at the lower operating ball entry section 62 (lower operating port 62a), and a right operating port display section DR that displays the lottery results based on winning at the right operating ball entry section 63 (right operating port 63a).

In the lower operating port display unit DL, a winning entry into the lower operating ball entry unit 62 (lower operating port 62a) triggers a changing display of a pattern, and as a result of the stopping of the changing display, the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the lower operating ball entry unit 62 is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the lower operating ball entry unit 62 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the changing display in the lower operating port display unit DL is stopped, a specified pattern is displayed as a stopping result, and then the transition to the above-mentioned opening/closing execution mode is made.

In the right operating port display section DR, a winning entry into the right operating ball entry section 63 is used as a trigger to display a varying pattern, and the result of the varying display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the right operating ball entry section 63 (right operating port 63a). If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the right operating ball entry section 63 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot or special win, the varying display in the right operating port display section DR is stopped, a specified pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the above-mentioned opening/closing execution mode is entered depending on the result.

Here, based on a win in any of the operating entry sections 62, 63, a variable display is started in the corresponding operating entry display section DL, DR, and a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped, which corresponds to one game round. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, and for example, in a configuration in which a single display area is provided and the variable display is performed in that single display area regardless of whether a win occurs in any of the operating entry sections 62, 63, a variable display is started in that single display area, and one game round is considered to be a period until the variable display is stopped with the predetermined stop result displayed.

The main display section D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a lower actuation port reserved number display section SL and a right actuation port reserved number display section SR. The lower actuation port reserved number display section SL corresponds to the lower actuation port 62a, and the number of times that a game ball has entered the lower actuation port 62a can be reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the lower actuation port reserved number display section SL. The right actuation port reserved number display section SR corresponds to the right actuation port 63a, and the number of times that a game ball has entered the right actuation port 63a can be reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the right actuation port reserved number display section SR.

In addition to the various display sections described above, the main display section D of the main display unit 81 is also provided with a through gate display section DS that displays the lottery results based on winning the through gate 66. The through gate display section DS displays the changing patterns triggered by winning the through gate 66, and as a result of the stopping of the changing display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning the through gate 66 is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on winning the through gate 66 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role opening state, the through gate display section DS displays a predetermined stopping result, the changing display is stopped, and then the electric role opening state is entered. In the electric role opening state, the electric role 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that a game ball has passed through the through gate 66 is reserved up to four times, and the main display section D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a through gate reserved number display section SS that displays the number of reserved balls.

Referring again to FIG. 2, the configuration of the inner frame 13 is described. Below the mounting area of the game board 60 in the resin base 50, a game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided that launches game balls toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41. The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches game balls placed at a predetermined launch waiting position, a launch rail 112 that determines the launch direction of the game balls launched by the solenoid 111, a ball delivery device 113 that supplies game balls to the launch waiting position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted. The base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50, thereby being integrated with the resin base 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so that it slopes upward toward the game board 60. A ball stopper that stops the game balls supplied from the ball sending device 113 in the above-mentioned launch waiting position is disposed near the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The above-mentioned solenoid 111 is disposed further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension/contraction direction, causing the game ball placed in the launch standby position to be launched toward the game board 60, or more specifically, toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game board 60.

The guide rail 100 defines the play area PE so that the outer shape of the play area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the play ball, and a guide passage 103 is defined by the two rails 101 and 102. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion that opens at the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion located at the top of the play area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the play area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 41, it is possible to hit the game ball to the area to the left of the variable display unit 67 in the play area PE or the area to the right of the variable display unit 67 in the play area PE.

In addition, a return prevention member 106 is attached to the front side of the exit portion of the game board 60, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103, thereby preventing game balls that have already reached the game area PE from interfering with the launch of subsequent game balls.

The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance of the guide rail 100 and the tip of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the bottom edge of the game board 60. In other words, the rails 100, 112 are arranged so that the entrance of the guide rail 100 and the tip of the launch rail 112 are offset left and right near the bottom edge of the game board 60. This brings the rails 100, 112 closer to the bottom edge of the game board 60, while forming a predetermined gap between the entrance of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage 46 is disposed below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is molded integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the play area PE and returns as a foul ball through the guide passage 103, the foul ball will enter the foul ball passage 46 through the above-mentioned gap. The foul ball passage 46 is connected to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in Figure 1. This reduces interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

A through hole is formed in the resin base 50 to the left of the launch rail 112 (more specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction, and a passage forming member 121 is disposed in this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50, and has a main body side upper dish passage and a main body side lower dish passage. The upstream sides of the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish passage lead to the game ball distribution section described later. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side upper dish passage, and the front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side lower dish passage.

An opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 50. The opening/closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at its lower end so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction, and a biasing member is provided to bias the opening/closing member to a forward position where the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side are closed. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened relative to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure, closing the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side. This prevents the stored balls from spilling out when the front door frame 14 is opened with game balls stored in the upper plate passage on the main body side or the lower plate passage on the main body side. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the upper tray passage on the main body side is connected to the upper tray passage on the front door side, and the lower tray passage on the main body side is connected to the lower tray passage on the front door side.

Next, the rear structure of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be described with reference to Figure 3.

Bearing fittings 132 are arranged side by side on the upper and lower sides of the rotation base end on the back surface of the resin base 50. The bearing fittings 132 are formed with bearing portions spaced apart from each other on the top and bottom, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

The back surface of the resin base 50 is provided with multiple locking fittings 135, and as described above, the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking fittings 135. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be explained.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67, which is located in the center of the game board 60, so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A notification/performance control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The notification/performance control device unit 142 is configured to include a notification/performance control device 143 and a mounting base 144, and the notification/performance control device 143 is attached to the mounting base 144.

The notification/performance control device 143 is equipped with a notification/performance control board that controls the audio and lamp displays, as well as the display control device, in accordance with instructions from the main control device, which will be described later. The notification/performance control board is housed in a board box 145 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, a collection plate 150 is provided on the back of the game board 60 below the variable display unit 67. The collection plate 150 is provided with a game ball recovery mechanism that recovers game balls that have entered the various winning holes, a detection mechanism that detects the entry of game balls into the various winning holes, etc.

Regarding the game ball recovery mechanism, the collecting board 150 is provided with recovery passages corresponding to the various ball entry sections such as the general winning opening 61. These recovery passages run down from the ball entry sections along the back of the game board 60, and define the path along which the game balls fall. The recovery passages join near the bottom end of the game board 60, and all game balls that pass through the ball entry sections such as the general winning opening 61 are collected at the bottom of the game board 60 via the recovery passages. The outlets of each recovery passage are open downward, and at the end of the outlets (more specifically, below the game board 60) there is a discharge passage, which will be described later. The game balls that have collected below the game board 60 through the recovery passages are led out to the discharge passage. The outlet 68 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won any of the winning openings are also led out to the discharge passage via the outlet 68.

Explaining the detection mechanism, the collection board 150 is provided with detection sensors that correspond to each of the various ball entry sections, such as the general winning opening 61. These various detection sensors are arranged at intermediate positions in each recovery passage leading to the ball entry section, such as the general winning opening 61, and detect the passage of the game ball when the falling path of the game ball is specified in the recovery passage. More specifically, each detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into a ball entry port, such as the general winning opening 61, when the game ball passes through a detection area provided at an intermediate position in each recovery passage. Specifically, a magnetic sensor is used that detects the change in the magnetic field that occurs when the game ball passes through the detection area.

These various detection sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (more specifically, the main control device) provided on the rear side of the game board 60, and the detection signals from these detection sensors are output to the main control device. The main control device unit 160 and its associated configuration will be described below.

The main control device unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the assembly board 150 from the rear, and is composed of a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board that has the function of controlling the main game (main control circuit) and the function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The substrate box 163 comprises a box base (front case body) of a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (rear case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other by a sealing part that serves as a sealing means so that they cannot be opened, thereby sealing the substrate box 163. A plurality of sealing parts are provided on the long sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing part as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner, but the box base and the box cover are connected to each other in an unopenable manner by inserting a locking claw into the long hole that constitutes the sealing part. The sealing process using the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been opened once. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the multiple sealing parts. Then, when the board box 163 is opened, such as when a malfunction occurs in the stored main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connection part between the sealing part into which the locking claw is inserted and the other sealing parts is cut. This separates the box base and the box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. If the sealing process is to be performed again, a locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other sealing part. If a record of the opening of the board box 163 is left on the board box 163, unauthorized opening can be easily detected by looking at the board box 163.

One short side of the board box 163 has multiple connecting pieces that protrude out to the side. These connecting pieces correspond one-to-one to the multiple connectable pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and the connecting pieces and the connectable pieces seal between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161.

The main control device 162 is provided with a setting change switch (corresponding to a "setting value changing means") that can change the "setting value" described below, and the setting change switch can be operated by opening the inner frame 13. Note that the setting change switch is not shown in Figure 3 etc.

(Back pack unit 15)
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201, to which a dispensing mechanism 202, a discharge passage panel and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, has a base part 211 to which the payout mechanism part 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover part 212 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover part 212 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

The base portion 211 has an external terminal board 213 at its upper right. The external terminal board 213 has various output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device on the gaming hall side through these output terminals. In addition, the base portion 211 has a pair of upper and lower hook pins at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13 by inserting the hook pins into the bearing fittings 132 (more specifically, the bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13. In addition, a fastener is provided at the rotating tip of the base portion 211 for fastening to a fastening hole provided in the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by fitting the fastener into the fastening hole.

The payout mechanism 202 is disposed on the base 211 so as to bypass the protective cover 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is disposed on the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. A tank rail that gently slopes toward the downstream side is connected to the bottom of the tank 221, and a case rail that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to a game ball distribution section provided on the base 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 222.

The game ball distribution section has the function of distributing game balls dispensed from the payout device 222 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described below, and is formed so that the inner opening leads to the upper tray 33 via the above-mentioned main body side upper tray passage and front door side upper tray passage, and the outer opening leads to the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage and front door side lower tray passage.

As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage panel and control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end from the front and rear. The discharge passage panel 203 has a discharge passage that is open to the rear on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open part of the discharge passage is blocked by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base on which the payout control device 181 and the power supply/launch control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply/launch control device 191 are stacked one behind the other so that the payout control device 181 is at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board that controls the payout device 222 is housed in a board box, and a status return switch provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box. For example, when the status return switch is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam is cleared.

The power supply and launch control device 191 has a power supply and launch control board housed in a board box, which generates and outputs the specified power required by various control devices, etc., and also controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41. The power supply and launch control device 191 is also provided with a RAM erase switch. This pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and holding various types of data, so that in the event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage can be retained, and when the power is restored, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, for example, if the power is cut off in the normal manner, such as when an amusement hall closes, the state before the power outage is stored and held, but if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized.

In this embodiment, the configuration related to the right-side operational ball entry section 63 and the variable entry devices 64, 65 arranged on the right route is distinctive. Below, we will provide additional explanations about these various ball entry sections with reference to the schematic diagrams of Figures 5 to 8. Figure 5 is a front view of the upper variable entry device 64, Figure 6 is a front view of the entry unit, Figure 7(a) is a perspective view of the right-side operational ball entry section 63 seen from the front, Figure 7(b) is a schematic diagram showing the passage structure in the right-side operational ball entry section 63, and Figure 8 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the passage length and the time required to pass through.

(Upper variable winning device 64)
The upper variable winning device 64 has a housing 310 with a ball passage 312 formed therein through which the game balls pass, and this housing 310 is attached to the game board 60 so as to bulge from the front surface of the game board 60 toward the front of the game machine. The housing 310 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the game balls flowing down the ball passage 312 can be seen through the outer periphery of the housing 310.

The portion of the housing 310 that bulges out toward the front of the game board 60 is formed with an upper large winning opening 311 that constitutes the entrance to the ball passage 312. The upper large winning opening 311 faces the midstream portion of the right route (the portion that extends vertically) from the side of the game machine (the right side), and a shutter 315 is disposed to cover the upper large winning opening 311 from the side of the game ball flow area (the right side) of the right route.

The shutter 315 is supported on a shaft so that it can rotate parallel to the front surface of the game board 60, and is configured to be displaced by rotation about the shaft support point between a closed position that prevents game balls from flowing into the upper large winning opening 311 and an open position that allows game balls to flow into the upper large winning opening 311.

The drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) for the shutter 315 is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main controller 162. The shutter 315 is configured to wait in the closed position when no drive signal is output from the main controller 162 (non-excited state).

When the shutter 315 is in the open position (open state), approximately half of the flow area (flow path) in the midstream part of the right route is cut off by the shutter 315, and most of the game balls flowing down the right route flow into the upper variable winning device 64 (ball passage 312) through the upper large winning port 311.

The ball passage 312 branches into a first branch passage 313 and a second branch passage 314 at a midpoint. A flow path switching member 316 is provided at this branch point, which can switch the flow destination of the game balls to the first branch passage 313 and the second branch passage 314. The drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 316 is connected to the main control device 162, and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. The flow path switching member 316 is configured to wait in a protruding position protruding into the ball passage 312 when no drive signal is output from the main control device 162 (non-excited state).

When the flow path switching member 316 is in the protruding position, the inlet of the second branch passage 314 is blocked by the flow path switching member 316. In this state, game balls that reach the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the second branch passage 314, and the game balls flow into the first branch passage 313.

When the main control device 162 outputs a drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 316, the flow path switching member 316 moves to a retracted position that avoids protruding into the ball passage 312, and the entrance portion of the second branch passage 314 is opened. This changes the destination of the game balls. In this state, game balls that reach the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the first branch passage 313, and these game balls flow into the second branch passage 314.

Here, the movement of the flow path switching member 316 is predefined depending on the type of jackpot result. Specifically, in the case of a normal jackpot result described below, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, and the flow path switching member 316 returns to the protruding position immediately thereafter. Specifically, the time required for the flow path switching member 316 to return to the protruding position is shorter than the time required for a game ball that has flowed into the upper large winning opening 311 to reach the branching portion. Therefore, in the case of a normal jackpot result, flow into the second branch passage 314 is essentially avoided.

In contrast, in the event of a guaranteed jackpot result, which will be described later, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, but it is then set to wait in the protruding position until the shutter 315 returns to the closed position. Therefore, in the event of a guaranteed jackpot result, most of the game balls that flow into the upper large winning opening 311 will flow into the second branch passage 314.

An upstream detection sensor 317 is provided in the ball passage 312 upstream of the branching portion, and downstream detection sensors 318, 319 are provided in the downstream of the branching portion, specifically the first branch passage 313 and the second branch passage 314. The upstream detection sensor 317 and the downstream detection sensors 318, 319 are connected to the main control device 162, which determines whether or not a prize has been won in the upper variable winning device 64 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 317, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls if a prize has been won. In addition, the remaining game balls are monitored based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 317 and the downstream detection sensors 318, 319.

In the main control device 162 shown in this embodiment, if it is determined that a ball has entered the second branch passage 314 during the opening and closing execution mode based on detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 318 attached to the first branch passage 313, the lottery mode switches from the low probability mode to the high probability mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends. Details will be described later, but in the high probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result is higher than in the low probability mode, allowing the player to play with an advantage. For ease of explanation, the second branch passage 314 will be referred to as the "advantageous ball entry section 314" below.

Of the game balls launched into the right route, most that pass through the upper variable winning device 64 head toward the ball-entry unit 70 disposed downstream of the upper variable winning device 64 on the right route. The ball-entry unit 70 is formed by integrating the above-mentioned right-side operating ball-entry section 63 and the lower variable winning device 65. The ball-entry unit 70 will be described below with reference to FIG. 6.

(Goal scoring unit 70)
The ball entry unit 70 has a housing 320 in which a ball passage 321 that constitutes a part of the right route (specifically, the downstream region) is formed, and the housing 320 is fixed to the game board 60 in a state where it bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 60. The ball passage 321 extends from the outside (right side) of the game area PE to the center (left side). In the upper right part of the bulging part of the housing 320, an entrance part 321a of the ball entry unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed so as to face upward, and in the lower left part, an exit part 321b of the ball entry unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed so as to face left.

The exit portion 321b is located directly below the lower operating ball entry portion 62, and the game ball flowing out from the exit portion 321b is guided below the lower operating ball entry portion 62. This prevents the game ball that has passed through the ball passage 321 from entering the lower operating ball entry portion 62.

The housing 320 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is configured so that the inside of the housing 320 (e.g., the game balls flowing down the ball passage 321) can be seen from the front of the gaming machine. Incidentally, in order to emphasize the unity of the right-side operating ball entry section 63 and the lower variable winning device 65, the housing 320 may be made opaque so that the internal structure is difficult or impossible to see.

The ball passage 321 has a prescribed passage width and passage height so that multiple game balls cannot pass through the same place at the same time, and is formed in a crank shape so that a step occurs midway in the passage direction. Specifically, the ball passage 321 is provided with a horizontally long upstream passage section 322 that constitutes the upstream part of the ball passage 321 and slopes downward toward the center of the gaming machine, and a horizontally long downstream passage section 324 that constitutes the downstream part of the ball passage 321 and slopes downward toward the center of the gaming machine, which are offset vertically and horizontally so that a difference in height occurs, with the former on the upper side and the latter on the lower side, and the upstream passage section 322 and downstream passage section 324 are connected by a vertically extending intermediate passage section 323 (corresponding to a "connecting passage section").

The above-mentioned right-side activation ball entrance 63 is provided adjacent to the upstream passage 322. Specifically, the right activation port 63a of the right-side activation ball entrance 63 is open upward, and the upstream passage 322 is formed to cross above the right activation port 63a. The electric role 71 attached to the right-side activation ball entrance 63 has a shutter 331 that can slide back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60) and an electric role drive unit 332 (solenoid) for the shutter 331. The electric role drive unit 332 is connected to the main control unit 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control unit 162. In a non-driven state (non-excited state) where no drive signal is output from the main control device 162, the shutter 331 is positioned in a closed position covering the right operating port 63a from above, and when a drive signal is output and the electric role drive unit 332 is put into a driven state (excited state), it moves (retreats) to an open position where it does not cover the right operating port 63a.

When the shutter 331 is in the closed position, the shutter 331 forms the bottom of the upstream passage 322, i.e., the rolling surface of the game ball. In detail, as shown in FIG. 7(a), the housing 320 is provided with an upstream bottom 322a that forms the bottom upstream of the right operating port 63a in the passage direction of the upstream passage 322, and a downstream bottom 322b that forms the bottom downstream of the right operating port 63a, and the rolling surface of the game ball is formed by the upstream bottom 322a, downstream bottom 322b, and shutter 331. In the following description, the area in the upstream passage 322 where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 331, i.e., the area in the upstream passage 322 facing the right operating port 63a across the shutter 331, is referred to as the "first specific area SE1" (see FIG. 6).

When the shutter 331 is in the open position and the upstream passage portion 322 (more specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off, the game ball that reaches the first specific area SE1 has difficulty moving in the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322, and will flow into the right operating port 63a.

In this embodiment, the first specific area SE1 is designed to decelerate the game ball passing through the first specific area SE1, thereby increasing the chances of winning at the right operating port 63a. This design will be explained below with reference to FIG. 7(b). Note that in FIG. 6(b), the path (flow path) through which the game ball passes is illustrated by a dashed line.

The front wall 335 and rear wall 336 that define the passage of the upstream passage 322 in the housing 320 are provided with protrusions 335a, 336a that protrude toward the first specific area SE1. The protrusions 335a, 336a extend vertically perpendicular to the passage direction of the upstream passage 322. In the following description, the protrusion 335a provided on the front wall 335 is referred to as the "front protrusion 335a," and the protrusion 336a provided on the rear wall 336 is referred to as the "rear protrusion 336a."

The gap dimension D1 between the rear wall 336 and the front protrusion 335a is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the gap dimension D2 between the front wall 335 and the rear protrusion 336a is also set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. The front protrusions 335a are arranged in a plurality (two in this embodiment) in the passage direction (guide direction) of the upstream passage 322, with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the rear protrusions 336a are arranged in a plurality (two in this embodiment) in the passage direction (guide direction) of the upstream passage 322, with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. The front protrusions 335a and the rear protrusions 336a are arranged alternately, so that the flow path of the game ball is designed to snake back and forth with respect to the passage direction of the upstream passage 322.

The sum of the amount of protrusion of the front protrusion 335a, the amount of protrusion of the rear protrusion 336a, and the diameter dimension D of the game ball is configured to be greater than the passage width of the upstream passage 322 (D3 < D). This prevents the game ball from running through the first specific area SE1 while avoiding collision with the protrusions 335a, 336a.

A gaming ball passing through the upstream passage section 322 collides with the protrusions 335a, 336a. This collision reduces (slows down) the speed at which the gaming ball moves in the first specific area SE1. In other words, the first specific area SE1 of the upstream passage section 322 functions as a deceleration section that forcibly decelerates the gaming ball. By configuring the gaming ball to decelerate as it passes through the upstream passage section 322 in this way, the time it takes for the gaming ball to pass through the first specific area SE1 is extended compared to when the protrusions 335a, 336a are defective.

The protrusions 335a and 336a are biased toward the middle passage section 323 in the first specific area SE1. This causes the game ball to decelerate immediately upstream of the middle passage section 323.

In this embodiment, the degree of deceleration is stipulated as follows. That is, the time required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area SE1 is stipulated to be shorter than the sum of the variable display time and fixed display time of the image on the through gate display unit DS in the low-frequency support mode (1.2 sec), and longer than the game ball launch cycle (0.6 sec). Details will be described later, but this results in a configuration in which, when game balls are continuously launched to the right route during the low-frequency support mode, the game balls flowing down the right route pass through the right-side operating ball entry unit 63 and reach the lower variable winning device 65, and at least one ball will enter in most cases when the right-side operating ball entry unit 63 is in the open state.

The game balls that do not flow into the right operating port 63a continue to move along the ball passage 321, and most of them reach the downstream passage section 324. Now, referring again to FIG. 6, the downstream passage section 324 and the associated lower variable winning device 65 will be described.

The lower large winning opening 341 of the lower variable winning device 65 is open upward, and a downstream passage section 324 is formed so as to cross above the lower large winning opening 341. The lower variable winning device 65 has a shutter 345 that can slide back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60) and a drive section (solenoid) for the shutter 345. The drive section for the shutter 345 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. In a non-driven state (non-excited state) in which no drive signal is output from the main control device 162, the shutter 345 is disposed in a closed position that covers the lower large winning opening 341 from above, and when a drive signal is output and the drive section is in a driven state (excited state), the shutter 345 moves (retracts) to an open position that does not cover the lower large winning opening 341.

When the shutter 345 is in the closed position, the shutter 345 forms the bottom of the downstream passage 324, i.e., the rolling surface of the game ball. In more detail, the housing 320 is provided with a downstream bottom that forms the bottom downstream of the lower large winning opening 341 in the passage direction of the downstream passage 324, and the rolling surface of the game ball is formed by the downstream bottom and the shutter 345. In the following explanation, the area in the downstream passage 324 where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 345, i.e., the area in the downstream passage 324 facing the lower large winning opening 341 across the shutter 345, is referred to as the "second specific area SE2."

When the shutter 345 is in the open position and the downstream passage portion 324 (more specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off, the game ball that reaches the second specific area SE2 has difficulty moving in the passage direction of the downstream passage portion 324, and will flow into the lower large winning opening 341.

The second specific area SE2 also has a deceleration section consisting of protrusions 375a, 376a (see FIG. 8), but the specific configuration of this deceleration section is similar to that of the first specific area SE1, so the explanation will be used here.

The intermediate passage section 323 described above extends upward from the upstream end of the shutter 345. The left passage wall surface that forms the intermediate passage section 323 is located on an extension of the upstream passage section 322, and the game ball that passes through the upstream passage section 322 collides with the left passage wall surface, changes direction, and falls down the intermediate passage section 323 toward the shutter 345.

An opening through which game balls can pass is formed in the right passage wall that forms the intermediate passage section 323, and some of the game balls that pass through the intermediate passage section 323 flow into this opening. Between the right-side operating ball entry section 63 and the lower variable winning device 65, a discharge passage is formed that discharges the game balls that flow into the opening from the ball entry unit 70. Some of the game balls that flow down the ball passage 321 are discharged from the ball entry unit 70 through the opening → discharge passage before reaching the lower variable winning device 65 (shutter 345). Note that game balls that pass through this discharge passage are guided directly to the back side of the game board 60, and are therefore prevented from moving to the outlet 68.

Next, referring to FIG. 8, we will provide additional information on the relationship between the passage length of each part of the ball passage 321 and the time required for the game ball to pass through. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the ball entry unit 70 as viewed from the front. In the following description, the passage length of the first specific area SE1 as viewed from the front of the game machine is referred to as the "passage length PL1", the time required to pass through the first specific area SE1 is referred to as the "required time T1", the passage length of the second specific area SE2 as viewed from the front of the game machine is referred to as the "passage length PL3", the time required to pass through the second specific area SE2 is referred to as the "required time T3", the passage length between the first specific area SE1 and the second specific area SE2 is referred to as the "passage length PL2", and the time required to pass between the first specific area SE1 and the second specific area SE2 is referred to as the "required time T3".

Comparing the passage lengths PL1 to PL3, the order is passage length PL2 < passage length PL1 < passage length PL3. As already explained, the path through which the game ball passes is meandering in the first specific area SE1 and the second specific area SE2, but even when this meandering is taken into account, the order is passage length PL2 < passage length PL1 < passage length PL3.

The details will be described later, but the required time T1 in the first specific area SE1 is set to be longer than the minimum interval time (0.7 sec) when the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is opened continuously in the low-frequency support mode and shorter than the minimum interval time (1.2 sec) when the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is opened continuously in the high-frequency support mode, and the required time T3 in the second specific area SE2 is set to be shorter than the minimum interval time (2 sec) when the lower variable winning device 65 is opened continuously when special wins are consecutive.

For example, when the lower variable winning device 65 is in the open state, a game ball that avoids the right-side actuated ball entry section 63 will head toward the lower variable winning device 65. By reducing the distance between the right-side actuated ball entry section 63 and the lower variable winning device 65, it is easier to give the impression that a game ball that avoids the right-side actuated ball entry section 63 will quickly head toward the lower variable winning device 65. This can suitably increase the anticipation of winning the lower variable winning device 65.

(Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control board 601 provided in the main control device 162 is equipped with an MPU 602. The MPU 602 is an element that incorporates a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 602, a RAM 604 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 603, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, and the like. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 602, such as the functions of the ROM 603 and the RAM 604, may be configured to be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 602 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 605 provided in the main control unit 162, a dispensing control unit 181, various detection sensors, etc. The power outage monitoring board 605 is connected to the power supply and launch control unit 191, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power outage monitoring board 605. Also, as part of the various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a for the general winning port 61, a detection sensor 391b for the lower operating ball entry portion 62, a detection sensor 391c for the right operating ball entry portion 63, detection sensors 317-318 for the upper variable winning device 64, a detection sensor 391d for the lower variable winning device 65, and a detection sensor 391e for the through gate 66 are connected, and based on the detection information (detection signals) from these various detection sensors 317-318, 391a-391e, the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 performs a winning judgment (ball entry judgment) for each ball entry portion. Also, the MPU 602 performs a lottery for generating a jackpot based on winning the lower operating ball entry portion 62 (lower operating port 62a) and the right operating ball entry portion 63 (right operating port 63a).

The output side of the MPU 602 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605, the payout control device 181, and the notification/presentation control device 143 (more specifically, the notification/presentation control board 651). The payout control device 181 outputs a prize ball command based on the winning judgment result for the winning ball entry section. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referenced. If a win is identified in the general winning port 61, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output; if a win is identified in the upper large winning port 311, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 14 game balls is output; if a win is identified in the lower large winning port 341, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output; if a win is identified in the lower operating port 62a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output; and if a win is identified in the right operating port 63a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is output.

The notification/performance control device 143 outputs various commands such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referenced. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is configured as a predetermined number of bytes of information, and various information is included as the predetermined number of bytes of information.

Also, the output side of the MPU 602 is connected to the electric device driver 332 which drives the electric device 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry unit 63, the variable winning drive 451 which drives the shutter 315 of the upper variable winning device 64, the flow path switching drive 452 which drives the flow path switching member 316 of the upper variable winning device 64, the variable winning drive 461 which drives the shutter 345 of the lower variable winning device 65, the main display unit 81, etc. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 controls the driving of various drive units etc. through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 602 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 451 of the upper variable winning device 64 and the variable winning drive unit 461 of the lower variable winning device 65 so that the upper large winning opening 311 and the lower large winning opening 341 are opened and closed. Also, for example, during each game round, the MPU 602 executes display control of the lower operating opening display unit DL and the right operating opening display unit DR in the main display unit D of the main display unit 81.

Furthermore, an external terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal board 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal and the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal when a state transition occurs. For example, when the game result is a jackpot, the MPU 602 can output a jackpot signal through the jackpot signal output terminal to the management and control device on the gaming hall side. Specifically, under normal circumstances, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when a jackpot result occurs, a HI level signal is output. Note that the output mode of this signal may be reversed.

The power failure monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power supply/launch control device 191, and also monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 191. The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply/launch control device 191 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement park. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 601, the payout control device 181, etc., and supplies the generated operating power through a specified power path.

The power supply/launch control device 191 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 (more specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when a predetermined launch condition is met. More specifically, the power supply/launch control device 191 is connected to an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball launch handle 41. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41, and the launch strength (launch speed) of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 110 is determined based on information from this operation level detection sensor. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player touches the game ball launch handle 41, and the power supply/launch control device 191 is configured to be able to know whether the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41 based on this information. Based on information from the touch sensor, it is determined that the player is touching the game ball launching handle 41, and if the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball launching handle 41 is being operated, the launch of the game ball is permitted.

Information from the touch sensor is transmitted via the power supply and launch control device 191 to the main control device 162, the notification and performance control device 143, and the display control device 710.

The notification/performance control device 143 has a notification/performance control board 651 equipped with an MPU 652, which contains a ROM 653 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 654, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 653 are executed.

The notification/performance control device 143 drives and controls the lamps 26-28 and speaker 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 710. In more detail, the notification/performance control device 143 determines the variable display mode of the patterns on the pattern display device 75 and the stopped display mode of the patterns that will ultimately be stopped and displayed (for example, the type of pattern combination) based on various commands input from the main control device 162, determines whether or not a reach will occur and the content of the reach performance, and transfers the determined content to the above command to the display control device 710.

The display control device 710 has a display control board equipped with an MPU, which contains a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM that stores image data, and a video RAM that temporarily stores image data read from the character ROM. The MPU controls the display of the variable display unit 67 (more specifically, the pattern display device 75) based on commands input from the notification/performance control device 143.

Here, we will explain the display contents of the pattern display device 75. Three pattern rows, left, center, and right, are set on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75. On the display screen 75a, the patterns of each of these pattern rows are displayed variably, scrolling periodically in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom).

The display screen 75a is also designed so that one symbol is statically displayed for each symbol row, for a total of three symbols. The display stops in the order of right symbol row → left symbol row → center symbol row, and when the display of all symbol rows ends with a predetermined symbol combination formed on the active line, a video or the like is displayed indicating a transition to a special game state corresponding to the result of a jackpot or special win.

In light of the fact that the variable display of each pattern row is stopped as described above, the left pattern row can be called the first pattern row (or first picture row), the right pattern row can be called the second pattern row (or second picture row), and the center pattern row can be called the third pattern row (or third picture row).

Incidentally, the manner in which the pattern display device 75 changes is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the changing display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows can be set to be arranged vertically, and the direction of the changing display of the patterns in the pattern rows can be set to be horizontal.

A reserved ball display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 75a. This reserved ball display area is composed of a reserved ball number display area for the upper operating port, which is partitioned so that the same number of unit reserved ball display areas as the maximum number of reserved balls when the game ball enters the lower operating port 62a are lined up in the left-right direction, and a reserved ball number display area for the lower operating port, which is partitioned so that the same number of unit reserved ball display areas as the maximum number of reserved balls when the game ball enters the right operating port 63a are lined up in the left-right direction.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the lower operating port 62a, the maximum number of reserved balls is four, and corresponding to this, the reserved number display area for the lower operating port is set to a first unit reserved display area, a second unit reserved display area, a third unit reserved display area, and a fourth unit reserved display area. In addition, when a game ball enters the right operating port 63a, the maximum number of reserved balls is four, and corresponding to this, the reserved number display area for the right operating port is set to a first unit reserved display area, a second unit reserved display area, a third unit reserved display area, and a fourth unit reserved display area.

For example, if the number of reserved balls is one when the game ball enters the lower operating port 62a, a predetermined reserved image is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area, and if the number of reserved balls is four when the game ball enters the lower operating port 62a, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area to the fourth unit reserved display area.

(Regarding various counters)
Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 10, the configuration relating to the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 602 uses various counter information during play to draw the transition to the special game state (open/close execution mode), set the display of the main display unit 81 (main display section D), set the pattern display of the pattern display device 75, etc. Specifically, it uses a winning random number counter C1 used to draw the occurrence of a big win or special win, a winning type counter C2 used to determine the type of the big win result, a reach random number counter C3 used to draw the occurrence of a reach display when the pattern display device 75 misses and changes, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS that determines the change display time of the picture on the ball entry section display section of the main display unit 81 and the change display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 75. In addition, it uses an opening random number counter C4 used to draw the lottery of whether or not the electric role 71 attached to the right-side operation ball entry section 63 is opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 set in a specified area of the RAM 604.

RAM 604 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 632 consisting of a lower actuation port reserved area Ra, a right actuation port reserved area Rb, a first execution area AE1 for the lower actuation port reserved area Ra, a second execution area AE2 for the right actuation port reserved area Rb, and a total reserved number memory area. In addition, this reserved ball storage area 632 is configured to chronologically store the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 according to the winning history of game balls into the lower actuation port 62a or the right actuation port 63a.

Regarding each counter in detail, the winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of "0" to "65535", for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 65535). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = "0" to "65535"). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the lower actuation port 62a or the right actuation port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the lower actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the lower actuation port 62a, and is stored in the right actuation port reserved area Rb of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the right actuation port 63a.

The random number values for winning the jackpot and the special jackpot are stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 621, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in the ROM 603. The contents of the win/loss table will be explained here using the schematic diagrams of Figures 11 and 12. A win/loss table is provided for each setting value, and the probability of winning the jackpot varies depending on the setting value. Specifically, a win/loss table corresponding to setting 1, a win/loss table corresponding to setting 2, and a win/loss table corresponding to setting 3 are provided. As the win/loss table, a win/loss table group for the lower operating port 62a (see Figure 11) and a win/loss table for the right operating port 63a (see Figure 12) are provided, and in a lottery based on a ball entering the lower operating port 62a, the win/loss table for the lower operating port 62a is referenced, and in a lottery based on a ball entering the right operating port 63a, the win/loss table for the right operating port 63a is referenced.

(Lower operating port hit/miss table)
First, referring to FIG. 11(a), a case where the lottery mode is the low probability mode will be described. When the winning/losing table corresponding to the setting 1 is referred to in the lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a big win is 250, and the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a special win is 0, and the values of the random numbers other than these correspond to a losing result. As a result, the probability of winning is 250/65536 and the probability of winning the special is 0/65536. When the winning/losing table corresponding to the setting 2 is referred to in the lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a big win is 300, and the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a special win is 0, and the values of the random numbers other than these correspond to a losing result. As a result, the probability of winning is 300/65536 and the probability of winning the special is 0/65536. When the winning/losing table for setting 3 is referenced in the above lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot win is 350, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a special win is 0, and the other random number values correspond to losing results. This makes the jackpot probability 350/65536 and the special win probability 0/65536.

Next, referring to FIG. 11(b), a case where the lottery mode is the high probability mode will be described. When the winning/losing table corresponding to setting 1 is referred to in the above lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that will result in a jackpot win is 500, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that will result in a special win is 0, and the values of the random numbers other than these correspond to miss results. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot is 500/65536 and the probability of winning a special win is 0/65536. When the winning/losing table corresponding to setting 2 is referred to in the above lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that will result in a jackpot win is 600, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that will result in a special win is 0, and the values of the random numbers other than these correspond to miss results. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot is 600/65536 and the probability of winning a special win is 0/65536. When the winning/losing table for setting 3 is referenced in the above lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot win is 700, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a special win is 0, and any random number value other than these corresponds to a losing result. This results in a jackpot probability of 700/65536 and a special win probability of 0/65536.

(Right-side operation port hit/miss table)
First, referring to FIG. 12(a), a case where the lottery mode is the low probability mode will be described. When the winning/losing table corresponding to the setting 1 is referred to in the above lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that will result in a big win is 250, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that will result in a special win is 64,800, and the other random number values correspond to the losing result. As a result, the big win probability is 250/65536, the special win probability is 64,800/65536, and the losing probability is 486/65536. When the winning/losing table corresponding to the setting 2 is referred to in the above lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that will result in a big win is 300, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that will result in a special win is 64,800, and the other random number values correspond to the losing result. This results in a jackpot probability of 300/65536, a special jackpot probability of 64800/65536, and a loss probability of 436/65536. When the winning/losing table for setting 3 is referenced in the above lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot win is 350, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a special jackpot win is 64800, and the values other than these random number values correspond to loss results. This results in a jackpot probability of 350/65536, a special jackpot probability of 64800/65536, and a loss probability of 386/65536.

Next, referring to FIG. 12(b), a case where the lottery mode is the high probability mode will be described. When the winning/losing table corresponding to setting 1 is referred to in the above lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that will result in a jackpot win is 500, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that will result in a special win is 64,800, and the other random number values correspond to a losing result. As a result, the jackpot probability is 500/65536, the special win probability is 64,800/65536, and the loss probability is 236/65536. When the winning/losing table corresponding to setting 2 is referred to in the above lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that will result in a jackpot win is 600, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that will result in a special win is 64,800, and the other random number values correspond to a losing result. This results in a jackpot probability of 600/65536, a special win probability of 64,800/65536, and a loss probability of 136/65536. When the win/loss table for setting 3 is referenced in the above lottery, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot win is 700, the number of random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a special win is 64,800, and the values of random numbers other than these correspond to loss results. This results in a jackpot probability of 700/65536, a special win probability of 64,800/65536, and a loss probability of 36/65536.

In this way, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to be advantageous for the player in the order of Setting 1 < Setting 2 < Setting 3.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 10, the winning type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of "0" to "99" and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e. "99"). The winning type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the lower actuation port 62a or the right actuation port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the lower actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the lower actuation port 62a, and it is stored in the right actuation port reserved area Rb of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the right actuation port 63a.

The allocation destination of the game result for the winning type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in the allocation table storage area 622, which serves as an allocation information group storage means in the ROM 603. In this embodiment, the type of the jackpot result is determined by referring to the winning type counter C2 and the allocation table. The jackpot results include 2R normal jackpot result, 8R normal jackpot result, 2R variable probability jackpot result, 6R variable probability jackpot result A, 6R variable probability jackpot result B, 6R variable probability jackpot result C, 6R variable probability jackpot result D, 6R variable probability jackpot result E, 8R variable probability jackpot result, 16R variable probability jackpot result A, and 16R variable probability jackpot result B.

(Lower operating port sorting table)
As shown in FIG. 13(a), in the distribution table for the lower operating port, of the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "99", a total of 50 values from "0" to "49" correspond to an 8R normal jackpot result, a total of 10 values from "50" to "59" correspond to a 6R special jackpot result A, a total of 8 values from "60" to "67" correspond to a 6R special jackpot result B, a total of 6 values from "68" to "73" correspond to a 6R special jackpot result C, a total of 4 values from "74" to "77" correspond to a 6R special jackpot result D, a total of 2 values from "78" to "79" correspond to a 6R special jackpot result E, a total of 18 values from "80" to "97" correspond to a 16R special jackpot result A, and a total of 2 values from "98" to "99" correspond to a 16R special jackpot result B.

(Right-side operating port distribution table)
As shown in FIG. 13B, in the right operating port distribution table, of the winning type counter C2 values of "0" to "99", a total of 35 values from "0" to "34" correspond to a 2R normal jackpot result, a total of 5 values from "35" to "39" correspond to a 2R special jackpot result, a total of 10 values from "40" to "49" correspond to a 6R special jackpot result A, a total of 4 values from "50" to "53" correspond to a 6R special jackpot result B, a total of 3 values from "54" to "56" correspond to a 6R special jackpot result C, a total of 2 values from "57" to "58" correspond to a 6R special jackpot result D, "59" corresponds to a 6R special jackpot result E, "60" to "95" correspond to a 16R special jackpot result A, and a total of 4 values from "96" to "99" correspond to a 16R special jackpot result B.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 10, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the lower actuation port 62a or the right actuation port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the lower actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the lower actuation port 62a, and is stored in the right actuation port reserved area Rb of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the right actuation port 63a. Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a reach display (reach state) based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603.

Here, the reach display refers to a display state that makes the player think that the game is in a variable display state that is likely to result in a special display result after the variable display of the patterns (pictures) has started on the pattern display device 75 and before the stopped display result is derived and displayed, in a gaming machine that has a pattern display device 75 that is capable of displaying a variable (or changeable) pattern (picture), and in which the stopped display result after the variable display can be a special display result in a game round in which the game result corresponds to the open/close execution mode.

In other words, it is a display state in which the patterns of some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 are stopped to display a combination of reach patterns that may result in a combination of patterns corresponding to the occurrence of the open/close execution mode, and in this state, the patterns of the remaining pattern rows are displayed in a variable manner.

More specifically, as a preliminary step to terminating the display of changing patterns, a reach line is formed by displaying a combination of reach patterns that may result in a combination of patterns corresponding to the occurrence of an open/close execution mode on a preset effective line in the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, and the display of changing patterns is performed using the final stopped pattern sequence while the reach line is formed.

To explain the display contents on the display screen 75a in more detail, first the display of the changing patterns in the right pattern row is terminated, and then when the display of the changing patterns in the left pattern row is terminated, a reach line is formed by the main patterns with numbers attached that make up the winning pattern combination being displayed still on one of the active lines, and when this reach line is formed, the display of changing patterns in the middle pattern row is performed, resulting in a reach display. Then, when a jackpot occurs, the display of changing patterns in the middle pattern row is terminated by causing the main patterns that form the reach line and the main patterns with numbers attached that make up the winning pattern combination to be displayed still on the reach line.

The reach display also includes a reach effect in which, while a reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are changed and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, and a reach effect is performed by reducing or hiding the reach symbol combination and then displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 75a. In addition, when a reach display is being performed or before a reach display, the decision of whether or not to perform a preview display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character may be made using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 602 to determine the time for which the patterns are displayed in the lower operating port display section DL and the right operating port display section DR of the main display unit 81 (main display section D), and the time for which the patterns are displayed in the pattern display device 75. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is obtained when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the lower operating port display section DL and the right operating port display section DR (at the start of the pattern variation by the pattern display device 75).

The opening random number counter C4 for the electric role 71 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 249, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The opening random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role memory area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 66. Then, at a predetermined timing, an opening lottery (support lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric role 71 to the open state by referring to the stored value of the opening random number counter C4 and the lottery table for support (win/lose information group) stored in the win/lose table memory area 621 of the ROM 603. Note that the probability of winning support in the high frequency support mode (specifically 249/250) is higher than the probability of winning support in the low frequency support mode (specifically 248/250), and the high frequency support mode is favored.

(Regarding various processes executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162)
Next, a description will be given of the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 602 in the main control device 162 to progress the game in each game round. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 602 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of these processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 14. This process is started by the MPU 602 periodically (for example, at 2 msec intervals).

In step S101, a reading process of various detection sensors (for example, the above-mentioned detection sensors 317 to 319, 391a to 391e) is executed. That is, the state of the various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, and the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, if it is determined that a win has occurred in the lower operating port 62a, a win detection flag for the lower operating port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604; if it is determined that a win has occurred in the right operating port 63a, a win detection flag for the right operating port is stored in the various flag storage area 635; if it is determined that a win has occurred in the upper variable winning device 64, a win detection flag for the upper large winning port is stored in the various flag storage area 635; if it is determined that a win has occurred in the favorable winning section 314, a win detection flag for the favorable winning section is stored in the various flag storage area 635; if it is determined that a win has occurred in the lower variable winning device 65, a win detection flag for the lower large winning port is stored in the various flag storage area 635.

Then, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the following step S103, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 604.

Then, in step S104, the through-winning process associated with winning at the through gate 66 is executed, and in the following step S105, the winning process associated with winning at the operating ports 62a and 63a is executed, after which the timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Winning process for skipping)
In the winning process for through in step S104, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 66. If the game ball has entered the through gate 66 and the number of reserved games SN is less than the upper limit (specifically, 4), the number of reserved games SN is incremented by 1, and the value of the open random number counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first free memory area of the electric game memory area 633 in the RAM 604. Then, this winning process is terminated.

If it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 66, or if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 66 but the number of reserved memories SN has reached the upper limit, the winning process is terminated without storing the value of the open random number counter C4.

In addition, in the winning process for through, display control processing is executed for the through gate reserved number display section SS of the main display unit 81. Specifically, light emission control processing is executed for the through gate reserved number display section SS, which is made up of four light emitters (LEDs), so that the same number of light emitters as the number of reserved memory SN of the role objects are lit.

(Winning process for the operating port)
In the winning process for the actuation port, first, whether or not the game ball has won (initial winning) at the lower actuation ball entry section 62 (lower actuation port 62a) is determined based on whether or not the winning detection flag for the lower actuation port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, if a detection signal indicating that the game ball has won at the lower actuation ball entry section 62 (lower actuation port 62a) is received, a winning ball command for paying out four game balls is set in the payout control device 181. Then, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that the game ball has won at the lower actuation ball entry section 62 (lower actuation port 62a) to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC is informed that a winning has occurred at the lower actuation ball entry section 62 (lower actuation port 62a).

Then, the value (start-up hold memory number) stored in the hold number memory area of the hold area Ra for the lower operating port is updated (increased by 1). Next, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the win random number counter C1, the win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and this winning process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the winning detection flag for the lower operating port is not stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, but the winning detection flag for the right operating port is stored, a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 181 to pay out one game ball. The set prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 181 by the external output process of the normal process described below.

Next, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the right-side actuation ball entry section 63 (right actuation port 63a) to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer HC to understand that a ball has entered the right-side actuation ball entry section 63 (right actuation port 63a).

Then, the value (start-up hold memory number) stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Rb for the right operating port is updated (1 is added). Next, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the win random number counter C1, the win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and this winning process is terminated.

If the game ball does not enter either the lower operating ball entry section 62 or the right operating ball entry section 63, the winning process ends.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 15. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in normal processing, main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as periodic processing with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, in step S201, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. Also, if a command for presentation such as a command corresponding to the presentation for a game round, such as a fluctuation start command, type command, or fluctuation end command, or a command corresponding to the presentation for the open/close execution mode is set, it is sent to the notification/presentation control device 143. Also, output settings for the external terminal board 213 are made according to the information set in the external output buffer of RAM 604.

Next, in step S202, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the next step S203, a game round control process is executed to progress each game round. In this game round control process, a win/loss determination is made for a jackpot, and a distribution determination is made for the type of jackpot. In addition, the process sets the display of the changing patterns by the pattern display device 75, and controls the display of the operating port display sections DL, DR, etc. in the main display unit 81 (main display section D).

After that, in step S204, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. Details will be described later, but this game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, or the like.

In the next step S205, an electric support process is executed to drive and control the electric role 71 attached to the right-side operating entrance section 63. In this electric support process, the information stored in the electric role memory area of the RAM 604 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric role 71, and the electric role 71 is opened and closed, and the display of the through gate display section DS is controlled.

In the next step S206, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined launch period (0.6 sec in this embodiment), provided that a launch permission signal output from the power supply/launch control device 191 is input based on the fact that a launch operation is being performed on the game ball launch handle 41. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the play area PE. In other words, if an irregular shot such as a so-called stop shot is not being performed, the launch of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined cycle, provided that a launch operation is being performed.

In the next step S207, it is determined whether a power outage flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The power outage flag is set when the power outage monitoring board 605 detects the occurrence of a power outage and inputs a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring board 605 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 602, and is cleared during the next main processing.

If the power outage flag is not set, the last of the multiple processes that are repeatedly executed has been completed, and so in step S208 it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S210, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated.

Here, the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S206 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power outage flag is set, this means that a power outage has occurred, and power outage processing from step S211 onwards is executed. Specifically, in step S211, timer interrupt processing is prohibited, and then in step S212, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved, and in step S213, access to RAM 604 is prohibited, and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

(Game play control process)
Here, the game play control process in step S203 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 16 to FIG. 20. As shown in FIG. 16, in the game play control process shown in this embodiment, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the special game state (opening and closing execution mode) is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an open-close execution mode flag (opening and closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in an open-close execution mode flag storage area (opening and closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The open-close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open-close execution mode in the game state shift process described later, and is erased when the open-close execution mode is terminated in the game state shift process.

If a positive judgment is made in step S301, the game round control process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S301, the game round control process (game round control process corresponding to the lower actuation ball entrance 62 (lower actuation ball entrance 62a)) is executed in step S302, and the game round control process (game round control process corresponding to the right actuation ball entrance 63 (right actuation ball entrance 63a)) is executed in step S303, and then the game round control process is terminated. The basic flow of these two control processes is the same. Below, the lower actuation ball entrance control process will be described first with reference to Figures 17 and 18, and then the right actuation ball entrance control process will be described with reference to Figures 19 and 20, focusing on the differences from the lower actuation ball entrance control process.

(Control process for lower operating port)
As shown in FIG. 17, in the lower operation port control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not a game related to the lower operation port 62a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the lower operation port display section DL of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game round is being played. This determination is made by determining whether or not a game round flag (game round information) for the lower operation port is stored (stored) in a game round flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The game round flag for the lower operation port is stored when a variable display is started in the lower operation port display section DL, and is erased when the picture is displayed stationary and the fixed display ends.

If a game is not in progress, a negative judgment is made in step S401, and the process proceeds to step S402. In step S402, it is judged whether a game is in progress for the right operating port 63a. Specifically, it is judged whether the right operating port display section DR of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to fixed display, that is, whether one game is being played. This judgment is made by judging whether a game turn flag (variable display information) for the right operating port is stored (stored) in a game turn flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The game turn flag for the right operating port is stored when a variable display is started in the right operating port display section DR, and is erased when a picture or the like corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is displayed stationary and the fixed display ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step S402, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is judged whether or not the number of play times related to the right actuation port 63a corresponds to a jackpot result. If a positive judgment is made in step S403, the process proceeds to step S403. If a negative judgment is made in step S403 or step S402, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the process refers to the total reserved number storage area of the reserved ball storage area 632, and judges whether or not the reserved memory number CRN for the lower actuation port (more specifically, the number of reserved information related to the lower actuation port 62a), which is the number of reserved information stored, is "0". If the reserved memory number CRN for the lower actuation port is "0", the process proceeds to step S405. On the other hand, if the reserved memory number CRN for the lower actuation port is not "0", the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process for the lower operating port 62a, first the reserved memory count CRN for the lower operating port is decremented by 1. After that, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Ra for the lower operating port is moved to the first execution area AE1 (see Figure 10), and a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the reserved area Ra for the lower operating port.

This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower areas in order, clearing the data in the first area and shifting the data in each area from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area. Then, one of the lit LEDs in the hold number display unit for the lower operating port is turned off. In this light-off process, the LEDs in the hold number display unit SL for the lower operating port are turned off in order from the bottom, in contrast to the light-on process that is executed when hold information is added.

After the data setting process described above is performed, in step S406, a process for starting the change in the pattern on the lower operating port display section DL and the change in the pattern on the pattern display device 75 (a process for starting the change in the lower operating port) is executed, and then the game number control process is terminated. Here, the process for starting the change in the lower operating port in step S406 will be described with reference to FIG. 18.

(Lower operating port fluctuation start processing)
In the lower operation port fluctuation start process, first, a win/loss determination process is executed in step S501. In the win/loss determination process, by referring to the win/loss table for the lower operation port, it is determined whether the information for win/loss determination among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, that is, the numerical information obtained from the win random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information described above. If the determination result in step S501 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S502 and the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, the type determination information stored in the first execution area AE1, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the winning type counter C2, is grasped. Also, by referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, it is determined whether the above-mentioned grasped type determination information is included in the information group corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result, the information group corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result A, the information group corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result B, the information group corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result C, the information group corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result D, the information group corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result E, the information group corresponding to the 16R special jackpot result A, or the information group corresponding to the 16R special jackpot result B.

In step S504, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (lower operation port display section DL) of the main display unit 81 in the relevant game round is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in ROM 603, and the specified information is stored in RAM 604. A plurality of images to be stopped and displayed on the main display section D are set in this stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S504, information indicating the image corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in RAM 604. In addition, in step S504, information for specifying in the MPU 602 whether the current game result is an 8R normal jackpot result, a 6R special jackpot result A, a 6R special jackpot result B, a 6R special jackpot result C, a 6R special jackpot result D, a 6R special jackpot result E, a 16R special jackpot result A, or a 16R special jackpot result B is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604. Specifically, if the result is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal flag is stored; if the result is a 6R special jackpot A, the 6R special jackpot A flag is stored; if the result is a 6R special jackpot B, the 6R special jackpot B flag is stored; if the result is a 6R special jackpot C, the 6R special jackpot C flag is stored; if the result is a 6R special jackpot D, the 6R special jackpot D flag is stored; if the result is a 6R special jackpot E, the 6R special jackpot E flag is stored; if the result is a 16R special jackpot A, the 16R special jackpot A flag is stored; if the result is a 16R special jackpot B, the 16R special jackpot B flag is stored.

After executing the setting process of step S504, the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the right actuation port 63a is being played. If the determination is affirmative in step S505, the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, a forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a game round (changing display of a pattern) related to the right actuation port 63a is being played, the game round (changing display of a pattern) related to the right actuation port 63a is forcibly terminated midway based on this forced termination flag. More specifically, if a game round related to the lower actuation port 62a corresponds to a jackpot result and a game round related to the right actuation port 63a can be executed beyond the timing when the confirmation display is performed in that game round, the game round related to the right actuation port 63a is shortened and the game round related to the right actuation port 63a is terminated together with the end of the game round related to the lower actuation port 62a. In such a case, the pattern displayed in the stopped state in the game round related to the right actuation port 63a corresponds to a miss result.

Returning to the explanation of step S502, if the determination result in step S501 is a miss result, a negative determination is made in step S502 and the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed.

Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (lower operating port display section DL) of the main display unit 81 in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is identified from a stop result table for losing results that is pre-stored in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604.

After executing the processes of steps S506 and S507, or if a negative judgment is made in step S505, the process proceeds to step S508. In step S508, a process for setting the variable display time (display duration) is executed. Details of this setting process will be described later.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S508, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S509. The variable start command includes information on the variable display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for when a reach does not occur is different from the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for when a reach occurs. Therefore, even if the variable start command does not include information on whether a reach has occurred, the notification/performance control device 143, which is the control device on the sub side, can determine whether a reach has occurred from the information on the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the variable start command includes information indicating whether a reach has occurred. Note that the variable start command may also include information directly indicating whether a reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process of step S509, the process proceeds to step S510, where the display of the lower operating port display section DL on the main display unit 81 is started, and then the process of starting the change for the lower operating port is terminated. In the process of step S510, a play-in-progress flag for the lower operating port is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This makes it possible to identify in subsequent processes that a play-in-progress (e.g., a change display) related to the lower operating port 62a is currently being executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 17 again, if a positive judgment is made in step S401, that is, if it is judged that a game round related to the lower actuation port 62a is in progress, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, it is judged whether it is the timing to stop and display a pattern corresponding to a special winning result in a game round related to the right actuation port 63a. If a negative judgment is made in step S407, the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, it is judged whether it is the start timing of a game round related to the right actuation port 63a that corresponds to a big winning result. If a negative judgment is made in steps S407 and S408, the process proceeds to step S409.

In step S409, it is determined whether the timing has passed the variable display time set in step S508 above. If a negative determination is made in step S409, variable display processing is executed in step S410, and then the lower operating port control processing is terminated. In the variable display processing in step S410, the various LEDs that make up the lower operating port display section DL are turned on and off, thereby displaying a variable pattern.

If a positive judgment is made in step S409, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S412, a change end process is executed. In the change end process, the display of the main display unit 81 is controlled so that the image is stopped and displayed in the lower operation port display section DL in a manner determined in advance. That is, for example, a final display of an image corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is executed. Note that the game play flag for the lower operation port stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 is erased when the final display is completed.

After setting the variation end command in the following step S413, this game round control process ends. The variation end command set in step S413 is sent to the notification/presentation control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification/presentation control device 143 executes a process to end the presentation for that game round based on receiving the variation end command. The variation end command is also sent to the display control device 710 via the notification/presentation control device 143, and by receiving the variation end command, the display control device 710 displays a combination of patterns corresponding to the game result of that game round on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 as a final display (final stop display). Note that the variation end command may not be sent, and the notification/presentation control device 143 or the display control device 710 may end the presentation for the game round independently.

Then, in step S414, the game count counter is updated, and in the following step S415, it is determined whether the game count counter is set to "0". If a negative determination is made in step S415, the lower operating port control process is terminated. The game count counter specifies the upper limit of the number of games for which the high frequency support mode is executed, and at the end of a jackpot, a number corresponding to the type of jackpot is set.

If a positive judgment is made in step S415, the process proceeds to step S416, where the high-frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 is erased, and a high-frequency support mode end command is set in step S417. This high-frequency support mode end command is output to the notification/performance control device 143 and the hall computer HC in the external output process of the normal process. Based on receiving the high-frequency support mode end command, the notification/performance control device 143 performs display etc. corresponding to the end of the high-frequency support mode.

If a positive judgment is made in either step S407 or step S408, a process for rewriting the stop pattern is executed in step S410, and after executing each process of steps S412 to S417 described above, the control process for the lower operating port is terminated. In the process for rewriting the stop result, it is first determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a special winning result. If it does not correspond to a special winning result, rewriting of the stop pattern determined in the process for starting the variation for the lower operating port (the pattern corresponding to a losing result) is avoided. In contrast, if the current game result corresponds to a special winning result, the stop pattern determined in the process for starting the variation for the lower operating port (the pattern corresponding to a special winning result) is rewritten to the pattern corresponding to a losing result.

Next, the control process for the right operating port will be explained with reference to Figures 19 and 20.

(Control process for right operating port)
As shown in FIG. 19, in the right operating port control process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not a game related to the right operating port 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the right operating port display section DR of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game is being played. This determination is made by determining whether or not a game turn flag (variable display information) for the right operating port is stored (stored) in a game turn flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The game turn flag for the right operating port is stored when a variable display is started in the right operating port display section DR, and is erased when the picture is stopped and the fixed display ends.

If a game round is not in progress, a negative judgment is made in step S601 and the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether a game round related to the lower operating port 62a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the lower operating port display section DL of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to fixed display, that is, whether one game round is being played.

If a positive judgment is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, it is judged whether or not the number of play times related to the lower actuation port 62a corresponds to a jackpot result. If a positive judgment is made in step S603, the control process for the right actuation port is terminated as it is. If a negative judgment is made in step S603, or if a negative judgment is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, the total reserved number storage area of the reserved ball storage area 632 is referenced, and it is judged whether or not the reserved memory number CRN for the right actuation port, which is the number of reserved information stored in the reserved information storage area, is "0". If the reserved memory number CRN for the right actuation port is "0", the control process for play times is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the reserved memory number CRN for the right actuation port is not "0", the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, a data setting process is performed.

In the data setting process for the right operating port 63a, first the reserved memory count CRN for the right operating port is decremented by 1. Then, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Rb for the right operating port is moved to the second execution area AE2 (see FIG. 10), and the process of shifting the data stored in the memory area of the reserved area Rb for the right operating port is executed.

This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first through fourth areas to the lower areas in order, clearing the data in the first area and shifting the data in each area from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area. Then, one of the lit LEDs in the hold number display for the right operating port is turned off. In this light-off process, the LEDs in the hold lamp section for the right operating port are turned off in order from the bottom, which is the opposite of the light-on process that is executed when hold information is added.

After the data setting process described above is performed, in step S606, a change start process for the right operating port (change start process for the right operating port) is executed to start the changing display of the patterns on the main display unit 81 (main display section D) and the changing display of the patterns on the pattern display device 75, and then this game play control process is terminated.

Now, with reference to Figure 20, we will explain the right operating port fluctuation start process in step S606.

(Right operating port fluctuation start processing)
In the right operation port fluctuation start process, first, a win/loss determination process is executed in step S701. In the win/loss determination process, a win/loss table for the right operation port is referenced to determine whether the information for win/loss determination among various information stored in the second execution area AE2, that is, the numerical information related to the win random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information described above. If the determination result in step S701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S703.

In step S703, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, the type determination information among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, i.e., the numerical information acquired from the winning type counter C2 and the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area 622 of the ROM 603 are referenced to determine whether the above-identified type determination information is included in the information group corresponding to the 2R normal jackpot result, the information group corresponding to the 2R special jackpot result, the information group corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result A, the information group corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result B, the information group corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result C, the information group corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result D, the information group corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result E, the information group corresponding to the 16R special jackpot result A, or the information group corresponding to the 16R special jackpot result B.

In step S704, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (right operating port display section DR) of the main display unit 81 in the relevant game round is identified from a stop result table for the jackpot result pre-stored in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604. This stop result table for the jackpot result has multiple images set for stopping and displayed on the main display section D, and in step S704, information indicating the image corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in RAM 604. Also, in step S704, information for the MPU 602 to specify whether the current game result is a 2R normal jackpot result, a 2R special jackpot result, a 6R special jackpot result A, a 6R special jackpot result B, a 6R special jackpot result C, a 6R special jackpot result D, a 6R special jackpot result E, a 16R special jackpot result A, or a 16R special jackpot result B is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if the result is a 2R normal jackpot, the 2R normal flag is stored; if the result is a 2R special jackpot, the 2R special jackpot flag is stored; if the result is a 6R special jackpot A, the 6R special jackpot A flag is stored; if the result is a 6R special jackpot B, the 6R special jackpot B flag is stored; if the result is a 6R special jackpot C, the 6R special jackpot C flag is stored; if the result is a 6R special jackpot D, the 6R special jackpot D flag is stored; if the result is a 6R special jackpot E, the 6R special jackpot E flag is stored; if the result is a 16R special jackpot A, the 16R special jackpot A flag is stored; if the result is a 16R special jackpot B, the 16R special jackpot B flag is stored.

After executing the setting process of step S704, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the lower actuation port 62a is being executed. If the determination is affirmative in step S705, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, a forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a game round related to the lower actuation port 62a (changing display of the image) is being executed, the game round related to the lower actuation port 62a (changing display of the image) is forcibly terminated midway based on this forced termination flag. More specifically, if a game round related to the right actuation port 63a corresponds to a jackpot result and a game round related to the lower actuation port 62a (corresponding to a miss result) can be executed beyond the timing when the confirmation display is performed in that game round, the game round related to the lower actuation port 62a is shortened and the game round related to the right actuation port 63a is terminated together with the game round related to the lower actuation port 62a. In such a case, the image displayed in a stopped state during the game involving the lower operating port 62a will correspond to a losing result.

Returning to the explanation of step S702, if the determination result in step S701 is a special winning result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and a positive determination is made in step S707, and the process proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, a stop result setting process for a special winning result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (right operating port display section DR) of the main display unit 81 in that game round is identified from a stop result table for a special winning result pre-stored in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604. This stop result table for a special winning result has multiple images set for stopping and displayed on the main display section D, and in step S703, information indicating the image corresponding to the special winning result is stored in RAM 604. Note that if the current game result is a special winning result, a special winning flag is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of RAM 604.

After executing the processing of step S707, the processing of steps S704 and S705 described above is executed.

If the determination result in step S701 is a losing result, negative determinations are made in steps S702 and S707, and the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (right operating port display section DR) of the main display unit 81 in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is identified from a stop result table for losing results pre-stored in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604.

After executing the processing of step S706 or step S709, or if a negative judgment is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S710. In step S710, a process for setting the variable display time (display duration) is executed. The details of this process for setting the variable display time will be described later.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S710, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S711. The variable start command includes information on the variable display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for when a reach does not occur is different from the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for when a reach occurs. Therefore, even if the variable start command does not include information on whether a reach has occurred, the notification/performance control device 143, which is the sub-side control device, can determine whether a reach has occurred from the information on the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the variable start command includes information indicating whether a reach has occurred. Note that the variable start command may also include information directly indicating whether a reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process of step S711, the process proceeds to step S712, where the variable display of the right operating port display section DR on the main display unit 81 is started, and then the right operating port variable start process is terminated. In the process of step S712, a play round flag for the right operating port is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This makes it possible to identify in subsequent processes that a play round (e.g. variable display) related to the right operating port 63a is currently being executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 19, if a positive determination is made in step S601, i.e., if it is determined that a game round related to the right operating port 63a is in progress, the process proceeds to step S608. In step S608, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a game round related to the lower operating port 62a that corresponds to a jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S608, the process proceeds to step S609.

In step S609, it is determined whether the variable display time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S609, the variable display process is executed in step S610, and then the right operating port control process is terminated. In the variable display process in step S610, the various LEDs that make up the right operating port display section DR are turned on and off, thereby causing the image to be displayed in a variable manner.

If positive stability is determined in step S609, the process proceeds to step S612. In step S612, a fluctuation end process is executed. In the fluctuation end process, the display of the main display unit 81 is controlled so that the image is stopped and displayed on the right operating port display section DR in a previously determined manner.

In the next step S613, a variation end command is set. The variation end command set in step S613 is sent to the notification/presentation control device 143 in step S201 in the normal processing (FIG. 15). In the notification/presentation control device 143, processing is executed to end the presentation for that game round based on receiving the variation end command. In addition, the variation end command is sent to the display control device 710 via the notification/presentation control device 143, and by receiving the variation end command, the display control device 710 displays a combination of patterns corresponding to the game result of that game round on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 as a final display (final stop display). Note that the variation end command may not be sent, and the notification/presentation control device 143 or the display control device 710 may end the presentation for the game round independently.

After the variable end command is set in step S613, the game count counter is updated in step S614, and then in step S615, it is determined whether the game count counter is set to "0". If a negative determination is made in step S615, the lower operating port control process is terminated. The game count counter specifies the upper limit of the number of games for which the high frequency support mode is executed, and at the end of a jackpot, a number corresponding to the type of jackpot is set.

If a positive judgment is made in step S615, the process proceeds to step S616, where the high-frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 is erased, and a high-frequency support mode end command is set in step S617. This high-frequency support mode end command is output to the notification/performance control device 143 and the hall computer HC in the external output process of the normal process. Based on receiving the high-frequency support mode end command, the notification/performance control device 143 performs display etc. corresponding to the end of the high-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S608, if a positive judgment is made in step S608, the process proceeds to step S611. In other words, if it is the start timing of a game round that corresponds to a jackpot result in the game round related to the lower operating port 62a, the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, a rewrite process of the stop result is performed.

In the process of rewriting the stop result, first, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a special win result. If it does not correspond to a special win result, rewriting of the stop pattern determined in the right operating port fluctuation start process (the pattern corresponding to a miss result) is avoided. In contrast, if the current game result corresponds to a special win result, the stop pattern determined in the right operating port fluctuation start process (the pattern corresponding to a special win result) is rewritten to the pattern corresponding to a miss result. After executing the process of step S611, the processes of steps S612 to S617 are executed, and then this right operating port control process is terminated.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 21 to 25. As already described, in this embodiment, there are provided a normal game state in which the game progresses based on the ball entering the operating port 62a, 63a, and a special game state (opening and closing execution mode) in which the variable winning devices 64, 65 are opened. The normal game state is composed of a first normal game state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode by the electric role 71 is a low frequency support mode, a second normal game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode by the electric role 71 is a high frequency support mode, a third normal game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode by the electric role 71 is a low frequency support mode, and a fourth normal game state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode by the electric role 71 is a high frequency support mode, and the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state are switched through a special game state corresponding to the big win result, etc.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, where it is determined whether or not a game round (more specifically, a confirmation display) has ended. If a game round has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If the game round has ended, more specifically if the preset stop display time (fixed display time) has elapsed since the variable display ended, the process proceeds to step S803, where it is determined whether the game result of the current game round (the result of the win/lose lottery) corresponds to a transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the above-mentioned 8R normal flag, 2R normal flag, 2R sure change flag, 6R sure change A flag, 6R sure change B flag, 6R sure change C flag, 6R sure change D flag, 6R sure change E flag, 16R sure change A flag, or 16R sure change B flag is stored in RAM 604. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, the opening/closing execution mode start process is executed in step S804. In this start process, first, an opening waiting time (start waiting time) is set for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, in which the variable winning device 65 waits without starting to open the upper large winning opening 311 of the variable winning device 65. Specifically, the opening waiting time information previously stored in the ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

In this embodiment, the waiting time for the opening (opening time) differs depending on the type of win. Specifically, the waiting time for the opening in the case of a big win is 5 seconds, whereas the waiting time for the opening in the case of a special win is shorter, specifically 8 msec.

In the next step S805, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the jackpot result. If the determination in step S805 is positive, the process proceeds to step S806, where a value corresponding to the current jackpot result is set to the round number counter RC provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a 2R jackpot result, the round number counter RC is set to "2", if the current jackpot result is a 6R jackpot result, the round number counter RC is set to "6", if the current jackpot result is an 8R jackpot result, the round number counter RC is set to "8", and if the current jackpot result is a 16R jackpot result, the round number counter RC is set to "16". The round number counter RC is decremented each time a round progresses, and when the value of the round number counter RC becomes "0", the current special game state ends.

In the next step S807, if a high-frequency support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the high-frequency support mode flag is erased. As a result, the support mode is maintained in the low-frequency support mode during the special game state corresponding to the big win result.

Returning to the explanation of step S805, if a negative judgment is made in step S805, that is, if the special game state is triggered by a special win result, the process proceeds to step S808. In step S808, a second winning mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. After that, in step S809, the round number counter is set to "1". In the subsequent processing, it is determined that the current special game state corresponds to a special win result based on the fact that the second winning mode flag is set.

After executing the process of step S807 or step S809, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, the opening command is set. This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. The content of this performance includes the display mode in the pattern display device 75, and this determined display mode is output from the notification/performance control device 143 to the display control device 710 as a display content command. The display control device 710 executes display control of the pattern display device 75 so that a display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode, for example, a moving image display of a character or the like as the display content corresponding to a big win, or a background image or the like is switched based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/performance control device 143.

After executing the opening command setting process in step S810, the external signal setting process is executed in step S811, and this game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process in step S811, it is determined whether any of the various jackpot flags and special win flags described above are stored in RAM 604, and if any flag is stored, a signal indicating that a jackpot or special win has occurred is output to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. By receiving this external signal, the management control device understands that a transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) has occurred.

Returning to the explanation of step S801, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, a positive determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large prize opening opening/closing process is executed in step S813.

Here, we will explain the big prize opening and closing process with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 22 to 24.

(Big prize opening and closing process)
As shown in Fig. 22, in the big prize opening opening and closing process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second prize mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S902, where the first opening and closing process is executed. The first opening and closing process is executed when the special game state (opening and closing execution mode) corresponding to the big prize result is established.

(First opening and closing process)
As shown in Fig. 23, in the first opening/closing process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 451 of the upper variable winning device 64. If the upper large winning opening 311 is not open, in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter RC is "0". If a positive determination is made in step S1002, the first opening/closing process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is judged whether the value of the timer counter TC1 provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604 is "0". The timer counter TC1 is a counter that is referenced when determining the opening time of the upper large winning opening 311, the interval time (interval time between rounds), etc., and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed. If a negative judgment is made in step S1003, the first opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the round number counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1004, where the opening process of the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 451 is driven to open the upper large winning opening 311.

Then, steps S1005 to S1006 are executed to set the closing conditions (opening setting) for the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311). Specifically, in step S1005, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (corresponding to 30 seconds), and in the following step S1006, the winning counter PC is set to "9."

In the next step S1007, it is determined whether or not this is the first round (first round) in the current special game state. If a positive determination is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1008. In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the current special game state corresponds to a guaranteed big win result. If a positive determination is made in step S1008, a guaranteed big win flow path switching process is executed in step S1009. In the guaranteed big win flow path switching process, a drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive unit 452 to move the flow path switching member 316 from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the duration for which the drive signal is to be output is set. This duration is the same length as the maximum opening time of the upper big winning opening 311. Therefore, when game balls are continuously shot to the right route, most of them will win the advantageous ball entry section 314, and the transition to the high probability mode is confirmed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1008, normal flow path switching processing is executed in step S1010. In the normal flow path switching processing, as in the guaranteed bonus flow path switching processing, a drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive unit 452 to move the flow path switching member 316 from the protruding position to the retracted position, and a duration for which the drive signal is to be output is set. This duration is shorter than the maximum opening time of the upper large winning opening 311. More specifically, a time shorter than the time required for a game ball that has flowed into the upper large winning opening 311 to reach the favorable ball entry section 314 (more specifically, the detection area of the detection sensor 319) is set. For this reason, even if game balls are continuously launched to the right route, entry into the favorable ball entry section 314 is basically avoided.

After the flow path switching process is executed in steps S1009 and S1010, or if a negative judgment is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1011, an opening command is set indicating that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) has been opened, and the first opening/closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (see FIG. 15). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is open, the process proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, it is determined whether it is time to return the flow path switching member 316 to the protruding position. Specifically, it is determined whether the duration set in steps S1009 and S1010 has elapsed. If a positive determination is made in step S1012, the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped in step S1013, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

If a negative determination is made in step S1012, or after the return process in step S1013 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1014. In step S1014, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1015, and it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper large winning hole 311 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 317 arranged in the upper variable winning device 64.

If a win has occurred, a win command output process is executed in step S1016. The win command is output to the notification/performance control device 143, which then changes the display on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 based on the win command.

After executing the command output process in step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1017. In step S1017, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1018, it is determined whether the value of the prize counter PC is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the process of opening and closing the large prize opening is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1018, i.e., if the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or if a positive judgment is made in step S1014 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is judged to be "0"), this means that the large winning opening closure condition is met. In this case, in step S1019, the variable winning drive unit 451 is set to a non-driven state to close the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311).

In the next step S1020, it is determined whether the flow path switching member 316 is in the retracted position. If the determination in step S1020 is affirmative, in step S1021, the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

After executing the return process in step S1021, or if a negative determination is made in step S1020, the process proceeds to step S1022, where the round number counter RC is updated. Specifically, if the value of the round number counter RC is not "0", the round number counter RC is decremented by 1, and if the value of the round number counter RC is "0", the value of the round number counter RC is maintained at "0".

Then, in step S1023, it is determined whether the updated value of the round number counter RC is "0". If the determination in step S1023 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1024, where the timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (corresponding to 2.0 sec).

After executing the process of step S1024, a close command is set in step S1025, and this first opening/closing process is terminated. This set close command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201 of the normal process (Figure 15). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the close command based on the received close command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S1023, if it is determined in step S1023 that the value of the round number counter RC is "0", the process proceeds to step S1026. In step S1026, the process of starting the ending is executed. In the process of starting, a waiting time for the ending (5 sec in this embodiment) is set for waiting without starting the next round of play for the ending of the open/close execution mode. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending that is pre-stored in ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 634 of RAM 604.

Then, in step S1027, an ending command is set, and the first opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201 of the normal process (Figure 15).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 22, if a positive determination is made in step S901, the second opening/closing process is executed in step S903. The second opening/closing process will be explained below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 24.

(Second opening and closing process)
In the second opening/closing process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is open or not. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 461 of the lower variable winning device 65. If the lower large winning opening 341 is not open, in step S1102, an opening process of the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 461 is driven to open the lower large winning opening 341.

Then, steps S1103 to S1104 are executed as a process for setting the closing conditions (setting process for when the opening is performed) for the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341). Specifically, in step S1103, the timer counter TC1 is set to "400" (corresponding to 0.8 sec), and in the following step S1104, the winning counter PC is set to "9".

Returning to the explanation of step S1101, if it is determined in step S1101 that the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is open, the process proceeds to step S1105, where it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1106, where it is determined whether a game ball has won the lower large winning opening 341 based on a detection signal from a ball entry detection sensor arranged in the lower variable winning device 65.

If a win has occurred, a win command output process is executed in step S1107. The win command is output to the notification/performance control device 143, which then changes the display on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 based on the win command.

After executing the command output process in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1109, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the second opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1109, i.e., if the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or if a positive judgment is made in step S1105 (i.e., if the value of the timer counter TC1 is judged to be "0"), this means that the large winning opening closure condition is met. In this case, in step S1110, the variable winning drive unit 461 is set to a non-driven state to close the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341).

In the next step S1111, the process of starting the ending is executed. In this process, a waiting time for the ending (0.2 sec in this embodiment) is set for the ending of the opening and closing execution mode, during which the next game round is to wait before starting. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is stored in advance in the ROM 603, is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

Then, in step S1112, an ending command is set, and the main prize opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is sent to the notification/performance control device 143 in step S201 of the normal process (Figure 15).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 21 again, after executing the large prize opening/closing process of step S813, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S814, it is determined whether or not the round count counter RC is at "0". If a negative determination is made in step S814, the process proceeds to step S815. In step S815, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S814.

On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter RC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S816, the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. Here, the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode is explained with reference to FIG. 25.

(Transition process when closing/opening execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, first, it is determined whether or not the current special game state corresponds to the first winning mode. If it corresponds to the first winning mode, a positive determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314 during the current special game state. If a ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1203. As a result, the lottery mode for the win/lose lottery becomes the high probability mode in the subsequent normal game state.

After executing the process of step S1203, or if a negative judgment is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is judged whether or not the current special game state corresponds to a transition to the high frequency support mode. If a positive judgment is made in step S1204, a high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604 in step S1205, and a value corresponding to the current jackpot result is set in the number of games counter provided in the various counter area 634 of RAM 604 in the following step S1206. The number of games counter is decremented each time a game is played, and when the value of the number of games counter becomes "0", the mode transitions from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

The details will be described later, but in this embodiment, for example, if a 16R special jackpot result occurs based on a ball entering the right operating port 63a in the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the transition to the high frequency support mode is avoided.

After executing the processing of step S1206, or if a negative judgment is made in steps S1201 or S1204, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, various flags for the special game state (e.g., the prize mode flag, the big win flag, etc.) stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 are erased, and this transition process ends.

Next, the electric support processing executed in step S205 of the normal processing (see FIG. 15) will be described with reference to FIG. 26 to FIG. 28. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the electric support processing, FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram comparing the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the electric opening and closing processing.

(Electricity support processing)
In the electric support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support in progress flag is stored in a support in progress flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The support in progress flag is a flag that is stored when the electric role 71 attached to the right operating port 63a is switched to the open state and is erased when the electric role 71 is returned to the closed state.

If the support in progress flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1302, where it is determined whether or not a support win flag is stored in the support win flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The support win flag is stored when the opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric role 71 is opened is won, and is erased when the support in progress flag is stored.

If the support win flag is not stored, proceed to step S1303 and determine whether the value of timer counter TC2 provided in various counter area 634 of RAM 604 is "0". If the value of timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main power role support process is terminated.

If the value of timer counter TC2 is "0", proceed to step S1304 and determine whether it is time to end the variable display of the patterns in the through gate display unit DS. If it is time to end the variable display, in step S1305, a miss display is set and timer counter TC2 is set to "250" (equivalent to 0.5 sec), and then the process for supporting this electric role is terminated. By setting the miss display, the variable display of the patterns in the through gate display unit DS is terminated with the miss display stopped, and this miss display will continue for 0.5 sec (see Figure 27).

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0" and it is not the time to end the variable display, proceed to step S1306 and determine whether the value of the number of reserved reel memories SN is greater than "0". If the value of the number of reserved reel memories SN is "0", the main electric reel support process ends as is. If the value of the number of reserved reel memories SN is greater than "0", step S1307 determines whether the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

If the high frequency support mode is in progress, a positive judgment is made in step S1307, and the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, whether or not support is provided by the electric role 71 is determined by a lottery (open lottery). Specifically, the value stored in the role reserve ball storage area of the electric role memory area 633 is shifted, and the opening lottery is performed by referring to the value of the opening random number counter C4 shifted to the execution area and the lottery table for the high frequency support mode stored in the win/lose table memory area 621 of the ROM 603. In addition, at the same time as the opening lottery, the timer counter TC2 is set to "100" (corresponding to 0.2 sec). The timer counter TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the variable display of the image on the through gate display unit DS continues until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes "0", that is, for 0.2 sec (see FIG. 27).

In the following step S1309, it is determined whether or not the result of the opening lottery in step S1308 is a winning result (support win). If it is not a support win, the main electric role support processing ends. If it is a support win, in step S1310, a support win flag is set in the various flags storage area 635 of RAM 604, and the main electric role support processing ends.

If the game is in the low-frequency support mode, a negative judgment is made in step S1307, and the program proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, a lottery (open lottery) is performed to determine whether or not support is provided by the electric role 71. Specifically, the value stored in the role reserve ball storage area of the electric role memory area 633 is shifted, and the opening lottery is performed by referring to the value of the opening random number counter C4 shifted to the execution area and the lottery table for the low-frequency support mode stored in the win/lose table memory area 621 of the ROM 603. In addition, at the same time as the opening lottery, the timer counter TC2 is set to "350" (i.e., equivalent to 0.7 sec). After that, the variable display of the image on the through gate display unit DS continues until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes "0", that is, for 0.7 sec (see FIG. 27).

In the following step S1312, it is determined whether or not the result of the opening lottery in step S1311 is a winning result (support win). If it is not a support win, the main electric role support processing ends. If it is a support win, in step S1313, a support win flag is set in the various flags storage area 635 of RAM 604, and the main electric role support processing ends.

The probability of winning support in high-frequency support mode (specifically 249/250) is higher than the probability of winning support in low-frequency support mode (specifically 248/250), so high-frequency support mode is favored.

Returning to the explanation of step S1302 in FIG. 26, if the support win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, a positive judgment is made in step S1302, and the process proceeds to step S1314 to judge whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the image variation display is in progress in the through gate display unit DS, so the main electric role support process is terminated. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", a win display is set in step S1315. This ends the display of the variation of the image in the role display unit 44 with the win display stopped. In the following step S1316, a support in progress flag is set in the various flag storage area 635, and the support win flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 is erased, and then the main electric role support process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1301, if a positive judgment is made in step S1301, i.e., if a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S1317, where an electric role opening/closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric role 71 is executed, and then the electric role support process is terminated. The electric role opening/closing process will be explained below with reference to FIG. 28.

(Electrical switching processing)
In the electric role opening and closing process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the electric role 71 is open. Whether the electric role 71 is open is determined by whether the electric role drive unit 332 is in a driving state. If the electric role 71 is open, the process proceeds to step S1402, and it is determined whether the number of winnings after the electric role 71 is opened has reached the upper limit (in this embodiment, "10") for the right operating port 63a attached thereto. If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403, and it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0".

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric role opening and closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", or if it is determined in step S1402 that the number of winnings has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, a closing process is performed to switch (return) the electric role 71 to the closed state. After that, in step S1405, the support in progress flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 is erased, and the main electric role opening and closing process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1401, if the electric role 71 is not open, a negative judgment is made in step S1401 and the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, it is judged whether the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the electric role opening and closing process is terminated. If the timer counter TC2 is "0", an opening process is executed in step S1407 to switch the electric role 71 to the open state.

Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the device is in high-frequency support mode. If the device is in high-frequency support mode, in step S1409, timer counter TC2 is set to "2850" (corresponding to 5.7 sec), and the main electric device opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the device is in low-frequency support mode, in step S1410, timer counter TC2 is set to "40" (corresponding to 0.08 sec), and the main electric device opening/closing process is terminated (see FIG. 27).

(Relationship between game state and variable display time)
As already explained, in this embodiment, the reserved information is acquired based on the ball entering the lower actuation port 62a and the right actuation port 63a, and the variable display and fixed display of the picture and the pattern in the game round are executed based on the acquired reserved information. Here, the variable display time of the picture and the pattern is set according to the game state. Below, referring to FIG. 29 to FIG. 31, the configuration related to the setting of the variable display time, etc. (variable display time setting process in the variable start process for the lower actuation port (see FIG. 18) and the variable display time setting process in the variable start process for the upper actuation port (see FIG. 19)) will be supplemented. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the variable display time setting process in the variable start process for the lower actuation port (variable display time setting process for the lower actuation port), FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variable display time setting process for the right actuation port, and FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the variable display time.

(Variable display time setting process for lower operating port)
As shown in Fig. 29, in the variable display time setting process for the lower operating port, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is in effect. If the determination in step S1501 is affirmative, the first normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1502, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the first normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from the various variable display time tables for the first normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603, and the variable display time is set according to the number of reserved information stored in the lower operation port reserved area Ra in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the win/lose lottery, and whether or not a reach has occurred.

The variable display time is configured so that when comparing a jackpot result with a miss result, the former tends to be longer than the latter, and in the case of a miss result where no reach display occurs (a complete miss), the variable display time is configured to be shorter as the number of reserved information stored increases. In FIG. 31 (a1), an example of the variable display time in the case of a complete miss in the first normal game state is shown. For example, when the number of reserved information stored is "0" or "1", the variable display time is set to one of "12, 13, or 14 sec", when the number of reserved information stored is "2", the variable display time is set to one of "7, 8, or 9 sec", and when the number of reserved information stored is "3" or "4", the variable display time is set to one of "3, 4, or 5 sec". In the first normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern in the lower operation port display unit DL and the fixed display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 75 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

Incidentally, in a game in which a reach display corresponding to a miss result (miss reach) occurs, the variable display time is set to anywhere from "20 to 40 seconds" regardless of the number of reserved information stored. This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in a game in which a jackpot result occurs (see FIG. 32 (a1)), and in the case of a jackpot result, a relatively long time within that range is likely to be set, while in the case of a miss result, a relatively short time within that range is likely to be set. In other words, a difference is provided so that a reach display with a long variable display time has a higher chance of a jackpot than a reach display with a short variable display time.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 29, if a negative judgment is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, it is judged whether or not the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode is being played. If a positive judgment is made in step S1503, a setting process for the second normal gaming state is executed in step S1504, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the second normal game state, the variable display time is set by selecting a table corresponding to the current game round from among the various variable display time tables for the second normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603.

In the second normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the selection of the variable display time is limited to one, regardless of various conditions such as the number of reserved information stored and the result of the win/lose lottery. Specifically, in the second normal game state, the variable display time is configured to be "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is "0.5 sec" for each play (see Figures 31(a2) and 32(a2)), and the variable display time is shorter than in the first normal game state.

In the second normal game state, the details will be described later, but by shooting the game ball into the right route formed in the game area PE, the game progresses to the player's advantage compared to when the game ball is aimed at the left route. The game ball shot to the right route enters the right actuation port 63a, and the game progresses mainly based on the reserved information related to the right actuation port 63a. In such a situation, the player may be confused by the interruption of a game round corresponding to the lower actuation port 62a, which is less advantageous than the right actuation port 63a. In this embodiment, taking such circumstances into consideration, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed by quickly playing the game round corresponding to the lower actuation port 62a after the transition to the second normal game state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1503 in FIG. 29, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is judged whether or not the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode is being entered. If a positive judgment is made in step S1505, a setting process for the third normal gaming state is executed in step S1506, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, the variable display time is set by selecting a table corresponding to the current game round from among the various variable display time tables for the third normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603.

In the third normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the selection of the variable display time is limited to one, regardless of various conditions such as the number of reserved information stored and the result of the win/lose lottery. Specifically, in the third normal game state, the variable display time is configured to be "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is configured to be "0.5 sec" for each play (see Figures 31(a3) and 32(a3)).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1505 of FIG. 29, i.e., if the game is in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1507, where the setting process for the fourth normal game state is executed, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the fourth normal game state, the variable display time is set by selecting a table corresponding to the current game round from among the various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603.

In the fourth normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the selection of the variable display time is limited to one, regardless of various conditions such as the number of reserved information stored and the result of the win/lose lottery. Specifically, in the fourth normal game state, the variable display time is configured to be "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is configured to be "0.5 sec" for each play (see Figures 31(a4) and 32(a4)).

(Right operating port variable display time setting process)
As shown in Fig. 30, in the variable display time setting process for the right operating port, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is in effect. If the determination in step S1601 is affirmative, the first normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1602, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the first normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from the various variable display time tables for the first normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603, and the variable display time is set. Note that the variable display time table referenced in the variable display time setting process for the right operating port is a different table from the variable display time table referenced in the variable display time setting process for the lower operating port.

In the first normal game state, the selection of the variable display time is limited to one, regardless of various conditions such as the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area Rb for the right operation port in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the winning/losing lottery, and whether or not a reach has occurred. Specifically, in the first normal game state, the variable display time is configured to be "600 sec" and the fixed display time is "1 sec" for each game (see Figure 31 (b1), Figure 32 (b1), Figure 33 (b1)). Although a game ball launched to the right route in the first normal game state can enter the right operation port 63a, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the right operation port 63a is "1", and it is necessary to wait 600 sec until the lottery result based on the winning of the right operation port 63a is announced. This suppresses the act of launching a game ball aiming at the right route in the first normal game state in order to advance the game advantageously.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 30, if a negative judgment is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is judged whether or not the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode is being played. If a positive judgment is made in step S1603, a setting process for the second normal gaming state is executed in step S1604, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the second normal game state, the variable display time is set by selecting a table corresponding to the current game round from among the various variable display time tables for the second normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603.

31(b2) and 32(b2) show the variable display time in the case of a miss result and a jackpot result in the second normal game state. In the case of a miss result, the variable display time is set to "30 to 40 sec" regardless of the number of reserved information stored. The variable display time = "30 to 40 sec" corresponds to a reach display, and in the case of a miss result or a jackpot result in the second normal game state, the reach display is passed through in both cases. The range of this variable display time is the same for both the jackpot result and the miss result, but in the case of a jackpot result, a relatively long time is likely to be set in that range, and in the case of a miss result, a relatively short time is likely to be set in that range. In other words, a difference is provided so that the reach display with a long variable display time has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach display with a short variable display time. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 33(b2), the variable display time in the case of a special win result in the second normal game state is configured to be "1 sec" regardless of the number of reserved information stored.

In addition, in the second normal game state, the time for which the image is displayed on the right operating port display section DR and the time for which the image is displayed on the image display device 75 are both standardized to "1 sec."

If a negative judgment is made in step S1603 in FIG. 30, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, it is judged whether or not the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode is being entered. If a positive judgment is made in step S1605, a setting process for the third normal gaming state is executed in step S1606, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, the variable display time is set by selecting a table corresponding to the current game round from among the various variable display time tables for the third normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603.

31(b3) and 32(b3) show the variable display time in the case of a miss result and a jackpot result in the third normal game state. In the case of a miss result, the variable display time is set to "30 to 40 sec" regardless of the number of reserved information stored. The variable display time = "30 to 40 sec" corresponds to a reach display, and in the case of a miss result or a jackpot result in the second normal game state, both are configured to go through the reach display. The range of this variable display time is the same for both the jackpot result and the miss result, but in the case of a jackpot result, a relatively long time is likely to be set in that range, and in the case of a miss result, a relatively short time is likely to be set in that range. In other words, a difference is provided so that the reach display with a long variable display time has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a reach display with a short variable display time. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 33(b3), the variable display time in the case of a special win result in the third normal game state is configured to be "1 sec" regardless of the number of reserved information stored.

In addition, in the third normal game state, the time for which the image is displayed on the right operating port display section DR and the time for which the image is displayed on the image display device 75 are both standardized to "1 sec."

If a negative judgment is made in step S1605 of FIG. 30, i.e., if the game is in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1607, where the setting process for the fourth normal game state is executed, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the fourth normal game state, the variable display time is set by selecting a table corresponding to the current game round from among the various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603.

31(b4) and 32(b4) show the variable display time in the case of a miss result and a jackpot result in the fourth normal game state. In the case of a miss result, the variable display time is set to "30 to 40 sec" regardless of the number of reserved information stored. The variable display time = "30 to 40 sec" corresponds to a reach display, and in the case of a miss result or a jackpot result in the second normal game state, both are configured to go through the reach display. The range of this variable display time is the same for both the jackpot result and the miss result, but in the case of a jackpot result, a relatively long time is likely to be set in that range, and in the case of a miss result, a relatively short time is likely to be set in that range. In other words, a difference is provided so that a reach display with a long variable display time has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a reach display with a short variable display time. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 33(b4), the variable display time in the case of a special win result in the fourth normal game state is configured to be "1 sec" regardless of the number of reserved information stored.

In the fourth normal game state, the time for which the image is displayed on the right operating port display section DR and the time for which the image is displayed on the image display device 75 are both standardized to 1 sec.

In this embodiment, the diversification of games is realized by switching between the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. In particular, when moving from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the hurdle depends on the number of games (hereinafter referred to as the "time-saving number of times") that the high-frequency support mode continues. Below, the relationship between the type of jackpot result and the time-saving number of times will be explained with reference to the schematic diagram in FIG. 34.

(Number of time reductions)
In the case where an 8R normal jackpot result is based on winning the lower operation port 62a, the number of time-saving times is set to "50" times, regardless of whether or not a ball has entered the advantageous ball entry portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. As described above, in the special game state (open/close execution mode) corresponding to an 8R normal jackpot result, the advantageous ball entry portion 314 is temporarily opened, but the advantageous ball entry portion 314 is closed before the game ball that has flowed into the upper large winning port 311 reaches the advantageous ball entry portion 314, so that the ball is essentially prevented from entering the advantageous ball entry portion 314.

When the 6R special jackpot result A is obtained based on the entry into the lower operating port 62a, the number of time-saving times is set to "100", regardless of whether or not the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 or the game state at the time of the winning. When the 6R special jackpot result B is obtained, the number of time-saving times is set to "70", regardless of whether or not the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 or the game state at the time of the winning. When the 6R special jackpot result C is obtained, the number of time-saving times is set to "50", regardless of whether or not the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 or the game state at the time of the winning. When the 6R special jackpot result D is obtained, the number of time-saving times is set to "30", regardless of whether or not the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 or the game state at the time of the winning. When the 6R special jackpot result E is obtained, the number of time-saving times is set to "10", regardless of whether or not the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 or the game state at the time of the winning.

As mentioned above, in the special game state (open/close execution mode) corresponding to the 6R special jackpot result A through the 6R special jackpot result E, if the game ball is continuously shot toward the right route, the ball will almost always land in the favorable ball entry area 314, preventing the transition to the high probability mode from being avoided even if a special jackpot result has been achieved.

When a 16R guaranteed jackpot result A or 16R guaranteed jackpot result B is obtained based on a winning entry into the lower operating port 62a, the number of time-saving times is set to "0", regardless of whether a ball enters the advantageous entry area 314 or the game state at the time of winning. In other words, with these jackpot results, the game does not transition to a normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode after the special game state (open/close execution mode) ends. Specifically, if a ball enters the advantageous entry area 314, the game transitions to a second normal game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, and if a ball does not enter the advantageous entry area 314, the game transitions to a first normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode.

When a 2R normal jackpot result is based on a winning entry into the right operating port 63a, the number of time-saving times is set to "50", regardless of whether or not a ball enters the advantageous entry area 314 or the game state at the time of winning. As described above, in the special game state (open/close execution mode) corresponding to a 2R normal jackpot result, the advantageous entry area 314 is temporarily opened, but the advantageous entry area 314 is closed before the game ball that has flowed into the large winning port 311 reaches the advantageous entry area 314, which essentially prevents the ball from entering the advantageous entry area 314.

When a 2R jackpot result is achieved based on a winning entry into the right operating port 63a, the number of time-saving times is set to "50", regardless of whether the ball enters the favorable ball entry area 314 or the game state at the time of the winning entry.

If a 6R special jackpot result A is reached based on a win in the right operating port 63a, but no ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "100". If a 6R special jackpot result A is reached and a ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times set varies depending on the game state at the time the 6R special jackpot result A is reached. If a 6R special jackpot result A is reached during the first normal game state, the number of time-saving times is set to "1000", and if a 6R special jackpot result A is reached during the second normal game state through the fourth normal game state, the number of time-saving times is set to "100".

When the 6R special jackpot result B is obtained based on the winning of the right operating port 63a, the number of time-saving times is set according to the presence or absence of a ball entering the favorable ball entry section 314 and the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, when the 6R special jackpot result B is obtained in the first normal game state but the ball does not enter the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "100", and when the 6R special jackpot result B is obtained in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state but the ball does not enter the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "70". On the other hand, when the 6R special jackpot result B is obtained in the first normal game state and the ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "1000", and when the 6R special jackpot result B is obtained in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state and the ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "70".

When the 6R special jackpot result C is obtained based on winning the right operating port 63a, the number of time-saving times is set according to whether or not a ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314 and the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the 6R special jackpot result C is obtained in the first normal game state but no ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "100", and if the 6R special jackpot result C is obtained in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state but no ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "50". On the other hand, if the 6R special jackpot result C is obtained in the first normal game state and a ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "1000", and if the 6R special jackpot result C is obtained in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state and a ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "50".

When the 6R special jackpot result D is reached based on winning the right operating port 63a, the number of time-saving times is set according to whether or not a ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314 and the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the 6R special jackpot result D is reached in the first normal game state but no ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "100", and if the 6R special jackpot result D is reached in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state but no ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "30". On the other hand, if the 6R special jackpot result D is reached in the first normal game state and a ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "1000", and if the 6R special jackpot result D is reached in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state and a ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "30".

When the 6R special jackpot result E is obtained based on winning the right operating port 63a, the number of time-saving times is set according to whether or not a ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314 and the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the 6R special jackpot result E is obtained in the first normal game state but a ball does not enter the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "100", and if the 6R special jackpot result E is obtained in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state but a ball does not enter the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "10". On the other hand, if the 6R special jackpot result E is obtained in the first normal game state and a ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "1000", and if the 6R special jackpot result E is obtained in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state and a ball has entered the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "10".

When the 16R special jackpot result A is obtained based on winning the right operating port 63a, the number of time-saving times is set according to the presence or absence of a ball entering the favorable ball entry section 314 and the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, when the 16R special jackpot result A is obtained in the first normal game state but the ball does not enter the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "100" times, and the game moves to the high-frequency support mode (moves to the fourth normal game state). When the 6R special jackpot result A is obtained in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state but the ball does not enter the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "0" times, and the game does not move to the high-frequency support mode (moves to the first normal game state). On the other hand, when the 16R special jackpot result A is obtained in the first normal game state and the ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "1000" times, and the game moves to the high-frequency support mode (moves to the second normal game state). If a 16R special jackpot result A occurs during the second to fourth normal game states and the ball lands in the favorable ball entry area 314, the number of time-saving times is set to "0" and the game does not transition to the high-frequency support mode (it transitions to the second normal game state).

When a 16R guaranteed jackpot result B is obtained based on a winning entry into the right operating port 63a, the number of time-saving times is set to "0" regardless of whether or not a ball lands in the favorable ball entry area 314 or the game state at the time of the winning. Specifically, if a ball does not land in the favorable ball entry area 314, the game transitions to a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and if a ball lands in the favorable ball entry area 314, the game transitions to a second normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

Here, in this embodiment, the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) to which the player transitions in the event of a jackpot result is broadly divided into a first winning mode and a second winning mode, which differ in the variable winning device to be opened and the opening/closing manner. In the event of a jackpot result, the game transitions to a special game state corresponding to the first winning mode. In the special game state corresponding to the first winning mode (hereinafter referred to as the first special game state), the upper variable winning device 64 is set as the object to be opened, and the opening is repeated up to a maximum of multiple rounds, with the passage of a predetermined opening time (specifically 30 sec) or the occurrence of a predetermined number of balls (specifically 9 balls) being one round. In contrast, in the event of a special winning result, the game transitions to a special game state corresponding to the second winning mode. In the special game state corresponding to the second winning mode (hereinafter referred to as the second special game state), the lower variable winning device 65 is set as the target to be opened, and the second special game state ends when either a predetermined opening time (specifically 0.8 sec) has elapsed or a predetermined number of winning balls (specifically 9 balls) have occurred. In this way, the first special game state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively high, and the second special game state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively low, and there is a difference in the number of winning balls that can be won.

(Game Flow)
Next, the basic flow of the game will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is a block diagram showing the flow of the game.

In the first normal game state, which corresponds to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, a jackpot lottery is executed when a winning ball enters the lower actuation port 62a arranged in the game area PE (left route). The first normal game state is set to give the player a lower advantage than the other normal game states.

If any type of jackpot result occurs in the first normal game state, the game transitions to the first special game state (open/close execution mode). In the first special game state, the favorable ball entry section 314 is opened depending on the type of jackpot result. If a ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the first special game state ends becomes the high probability mode. If a ball does not enter the favorable ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the first special game state ends becomes the low probability mode.

In detail, if the first special game state is triggered by an 8R normal jackpot result or a 2R normal jackpot result, the ball is prevented from entering the advantageous ball entry section 314. Therefore, the game state after the end of the first special game state becomes the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The fourth normal game state is maintained until the number of times of play performed in the fourth normal game state reaches a specified number (50 times in this embodiment), and when the number of times of play performed reaches the specified number, the game transitions to the first normal game state set to have a lower advantage for the player than the fourth normal game state. Although the number of times of play is limited in the fourth normal game state, the game can be played while suppressing the loss of balls with the support of the electric role 71. And, since the ball can be expected to enter the right operating port 63a, which is favored so that the distribution of the jackpot result is favorable to the player, it becomes a chance to transition to the second normal game state and the third normal game state, which are more advantageous than the fourth normal game state.

As already explained, when a winning entry into the right operating port 63a occurs, most of the lotteries based on the winning entry will result in a special winning result. In other words, in the fourth normal game state, a special winning result will occur in almost every game round, and the game state will transition to the second special game state in each game round. When the game state transitions to the second special game state, the lower variable winning device 65 will be opened, but most of the game balls launched to the right route will win into the right operating port 63a and be discharged from the game area PE, and winning into the lower variable winning device 65 will be suppressed. Below, the movement of the game balls in the fourth normal game state will be explained with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 34.

In the fourth normal game state, the opening time of the electric device 71 is extended from 0.08 sec to 5.7 sec, increasing the number of winning balls entering the right operating port 63a. The variable display time of the through gate display unit DS is shortened from 0.7 sec to 0.2 sec, shortening the time (first interval time) that the electric device 71 is maintained in the closed state, and reducing the number of game balls that pass through the right operating port 63a. As a result, most of the game balls launched into the right route will enter the right operating port 63a.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36(a) → FIG. 36(b) → FIG. 36(c), when a game ball passes through the through gate 66, the shutter 331 of the electric device 71 moves from the closed position to the open position, and the upstream passage portion 322 is cut off. As a result, the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 flows into the right operating port 63a. Here, the time required for the game ball to pass over the shutter 331 (the first specific area SE1) is set to be slightly longer than the first interval time, so that when game balls are continuously launched toward the right route, most of the game balls flow into the right operating port 63a, and movement toward the lower variable winning device 65 is avoided.

The number of prize balls paid out by winning the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning port 341) is "10", and the number of prize balls paid out by winning the right-side operating ball entry section 63 (right operating port 63a) is more than "1". However, as mentioned above, most of the game balls launched to the right route win the right operating port 63a, and winning balls by winning the lower large winning port 341 are rare. Therefore, although it is possible to progress in the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held in the fourth normal game state, it is substantially difficult to increase the number of balls held.

In this embodiment, when game balls are continuously shot to the right route in the fourth normal game state, the shooting interval time is "0.6 sec", the closing time of the electric device 71 is approximately "0.7 sec", the opening time of the electric device 71 is "5.7 sec", the time required for a game round is "2 sec", and the time required for the second special game state is "0.8 sec". For the above reasons, when game balls are continuously shot to the right route in the fourth normal game state, there will be many winnings that exceed the reserved upper limit of the right operating port 63a, that is, over-winnings where no new reserved information is acquired. Even in this case, the prize balls based on the winnings based on the right operating port 63a are guaranteed, so the speed at which the number of balls decreases will clearly slow down.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 33, if the current first special game state is triggered by a 6R special jackpot result A to 6R special jackpot result E or a 2R special jackpot result, as long as the game ball continues to be fired toward the right route, the ball will enter the favorable ball entry section 314. For this reason, in most cases, the game state after the end of the first special game state becomes the second normal game state, which corresponds to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode.

The second normal game state is maintained until the number of times that have been played in the second normal game state reaches a specified number (10 to 100 times in this embodiment), and when the number of times that have been played reaches the specified number, the game state transitions to a third normal game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state.

During the second normal game state, a play counter is displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 as information corresponding to the number of plays remaining until the specified number is reached. The displayed play counter is displayed as a countdown each time a play progresses, and when the specified number is reached and the remaining number becomes "0", a display effect corresponding to a transition to the third normal game state is executed. This clearly indicates the transition to the third normal game state.

The second normal game state also corresponds to the high frequency support mode like the fourth normal game state, and the support of the electric device 71 allows the player to play while suppressing the loss of balls. At this time, although the lower variable winning device 65 is opened by winning the right operating port 63a, most of the game balls launched to the right route win the right operating port 63a, and are prevented from reaching the lower variable winning device 65 arranged downstream of the right operating port 63a. For this reason, in the second normal game state as well as in the fourth normal game state, it is practically difficult to increase the number of balls held. Please refer to FIG. 34 for the flow of game balls in the second normal game state.

When the number of times played in the second normal game state without resulting in a jackpot reaches a specified number, the support mode switches from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, unlike the high-frequency support mode, there is no upper limit set on the number of times played in the high-probability mode. Therefore, when the specified number is reached, the game transitions to the third normal game state, which is compatible with both the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode.

As already explained, when a winning combination occurs in the right operating port 63a, most of the lotteries based on the winning combination result in a special winning combination. In other words, in the third normal game state, a special winning combination occurs in almost every game round, and the game state transitions to the second special game state in each game round. In this respect, it is the same as the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state described above.

However, when the game moves to the second special game state, the lower variable winning device 65 is opened, and some of the game balls launched to the right route pass through the right operating port 63a and head toward the lower variable winning device 65, and the number of balls held increases as a result of winning the lower variable winning device 65. Below, the movement of the game balls in the third normal game state will be explained with reference to the schematic diagrams in Figures 37 to 38.

The third normal game state corresponds to the low frequency support mode, in which the opening time of the electric device 71 is shortened from "5.7 sec" to "0.08 sec", and the variable display time of the through gate display unit DS is extended from "0.2 sec" to "0.7 sec". In other words, the period during which the electric device 71 is in the closed state becomes longer, and the period during which it is in the open state becomes shorter. Here, as described above, the sum of the variable display time "0.7 sec" of the image on the through gate display unit DS and the fixed display time "0.5 sec", that is, "1.2 sec", is the time during which the shutter 331 is maintained in the closed state, that is, the effective interval time (hereinafter referred to as the second interval time). This second interval time is set to be longer than the time required for the game ball to pass above the shutter 331 (first specific area SE1). As a result, some of the game balls launched to the right route will pass through the right operating port 63a and head toward the lower variable winning device 65. In other words, the number of winning balls at the right operating port 63a will decrease, and the number of game balls that pass through the right operating port 63a will increase. As a result, the number of winning balls at the lower large winning port 341 will increase.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 37(a) -> 37(b) -> 37(c), when a game ball passes through the through gate 66, the shutter 331 of the electric device 71 moves from the closed position to the open position, and the upstream passage portion 322 is cut off. As a result, the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 flows into the right operating port 63a. When a win occurs in the right operating port 63a, most of the lottery results will be a special win, and the lower variable winning device 65 will be opened.

As shown in Figure 37 (d) to Figure 37 (e), when a game ball that passes through the right operating port 63a enters the lower variable winning device 65, 10 prize balls will be paid out. The number of prize balls paid out for winning the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning port 341) is greater than the number of prize balls paid out for winning the right side operating ball entry section 63 (right operating port 63a). This increases the number of balls held.

Here, the time required to pass through the first specific area SE1 is longer than the launch cycle of the game ball, which is 0.6 sec, and the interval time until the electric device 71 goes from open to closed to open is 1.2 sec. The time that the electric device 71 is maintained in the open state, which is 0.08 sec, is longer than the time required for a game ball on the shutter 331 to pass through the right operating port 63a. For this reason, when game balls are continuously launched to the right route, one entry into the right operating port 63a occurs each time the electric device 71 opens, and approximately half of the game balls that reach the ball entry unit 70 enter the right operating port 63a.

In the third normal game state, the variable display time for the right operating port 63a is 1 sec, and the fixed display time is 1 sec. In other words, when the transition to the second special game state is continuous, the interval time required for the lower variable winning device 65 to go from the accepting state to the non-accepting state to the accepting state is "2 sec". The time required for the game ball that has reached the lower variable winning device 65 to pass through the second specific area SE2 is longer than the interval time. For this reason, of the game balls that pass through the right operating port 63a and reach the lower variable winning device 65, most will win in the lower large winning port 341 (see Figures 38(e) and 38(f)). In general, although some thinning may occur, a configuration has been achieved in which approximately one in two game balls launched along the right route and reaching the ball entry unit 70 will enter the right operating port 63a, and approximately one in two will enter the lower large entry port 341.

In the third normal game state, although the number of winning balls and the winning rate for the right operating port 63a are not as high as those in the second and fourth normal game states, balls constantly enter the right operating port 63a, and the game progresses with the number of reserved balls (reserved balls) related to the right operating port 63a fluctuating between "3" and "4". However, strictly speaking, in the second and fourth normal game states, the number of winning balls is often greater than the upper limit of the reserved balls, whereas in the third normal game state, only winning balls that slightly exceed the upper limit of the reserved balls occur. However, considering that no new reserved balls are acquired when a winning ball that exceeds the upper limit occurs, the actual number of reserved balls does not change as much as the difference in the number of winning balls and the winning rate. In other words, in the second and fourth normal game states, the number of winning balls is more likely to exceed the upper limit of the reserved balls, and the state is differentiated so that there are more winning balls for which reserved balls are not acquired compared to the third normal game state.

Here, the condition for transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state is to play the maximum number of times (prescribed number of times or time-saving number of times) set at the time of transition to the second normal game state, but this maximum number differs depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the second normal game state. For example, for a 2R special jackpot result, the maximum number is set to "50", for a 6R special jackpot result A, the maximum number is set to "100", for a 6R special jackpot result B, the maximum number is set to "70", for a 6R special jackpot result C, the maximum number is set to "50", for a 6R special jackpot result D, the maximum number is set to "30", and for a 6R special jackpot result E, the maximum number is set to "10". In other words, the probability of transitioning to the third normal game state is configured to be higher in the following order: 6R special jackpot result A < 6R special jackpot result B < 6R special jackpot result C, 2R special jackpot result < 6R special jackpot result D < 6R special jackpot result E. By providing differences in the hurdles to transitioning to the third normal game state in this way, diversification of the game is achieved.

If a jackpot result is obtained in the third normal game state, the game will transition to the first special game state. If the current first special game state is triggered by a 16R special jackpot result A or a 16R special jackpot result B, the game will immediately return to the third normal game state after the first special game state ends, providing a chance to increase the number of balls in hand. In contrast, if the current third normal game state is triggered by a 2R special jackpot result or any of the 6R special jackpot results A through E, the game will transition to the second normal game state after the first special game state ends, and the game will be played again with the aim of transitioning to the third normal game state.

In this embodiment, there is still a chance to return to the third normal game state for both the second and fourth normal game states, but when taking into account the possibility of returning to the third normal game state via the second normal game state, a difference is provided so that returning to the second normal game state is easier than returning to the fourth normal game state.

As described above in detail, the pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment is configured to generate two states with different ball increase patterns, and the combination of these two increase patterns prevents the game progress from becoming monotonous in a game state that is advantageous to the player. Here, with reference to Figure 39, we will provide a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the game flow and balls in this pachinko machine 10.

When balls are launched in the left direction in the first normal game state, the number of balls held will decrease as the game progresses. If a jackpot is reached under such a situation of continued investment and the game transitions to the first special game state, the number of balls held will increase significantly due to frequent winnings in the upper variable winning device 64. Specifically, the first special game state is configured so that nine balls can actually win during a round of play. Since one winning ball pays out 14 balls, 126 balls can be won in one round. This round of play is then repeated multiple times after an interval of 2 seconds, providing a chance to win a large number of balls at once.

In the first round in the first special game state, the favorable ball entry section 314 is opened. If a ball enters the favorable ball entry section 314 in this round, the game state transitions to the second normal game state after the first special game state ends. In the second normal game state, the support mode of the electric device 71 becomes the high-frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls launched to the right route enter the right operating port 63a, but the number of prize balls paid out by winning the right operating port 63a is one. In addition, considering that some of the game balls launched to the right route are discharged from the game area PE without entering any of the ball entry sections corresponding to the prize balls, the number of balls held will gradually decrease even in the second normal game state. However, since prize balls can be acquired by winning the right operating port 63a, the rate at which the number of balls held decreases is slower than in the first normal game state.

As already explained, if the number of play times consumed without a jackpot result after the transition to the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, the game state transitions to the third normal game state. In the third normal game state, the high probability mode is maintained, but the support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode, and the number of game balls passing through the right operating port 63a increases. Most of the game balls that pass through the right operating port 63a will enter the lower large winning port 341. As described above, about half of the game balls that reach the ball entry unit 70 head toward the lower variable winning device 65, and about one winning occurs each time the second special game state is entered and the lower variable winning device 65 is in an accepting state. Since the number of winning balls paid out by winning the lower variable winning device 65 is 10, 10 balls are added each time the game state transitions to the second special game state. In other words, about 10 balls are added each time a game is played. Considering these circumstances, if the player transitions to the third normal game state, a special win may occur before the next big win, causing the player to repeatedly transition to the third special game state, providing an opportunity to significantly increase the number of balls held.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of Figure 40, a supplementary explanation will be given of the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710.

The notification/performance control board 651 provided in the notification/performance control device 143 is equipped with an MPU 652. The MPU 652 has built-in ROM 653 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 652, RAM 654 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 653, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 653 and RAM 654 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 652, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. This is also true for the MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 652 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 652, and receives game round control commands (game round control information) such as the above-mentioned fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command from the main control device 162. It also receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and furthermore, opening and closing execution mode commands (opening and closing execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 652 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided in the front door frame 14, and the display control device 710. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/performance control device 143 are sent to the display control device 710 while maintaining the information format.

The display control device 710 includes an MPU 712, which is an element in which a program ROM 713 and a work RAM 714 are integrated into a chip, a display control board 711 on which a video display processor (VDP) 715, a character ROM 716, and a video RAM 717 are mounted. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 713 and the work RAM 714 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 712, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 712 of the display control device 710 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/performance control device 143, or performs predetermined calculation processing based on the various received commands, and controls the VDP 715 (specifically, generates internal commands for the VDP 715). In detail, the MPU 712 executes processing to identify the variable display pattern for each game round in the pattern display device 75 based on the commands sent from the notification/performance control device 143, and executes drawing processing for the VDP 715 in response to the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75.

The program ROM 713 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 712. The work RAM 714 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 712 executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 714.

The VDP715 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 75. The VDP715 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP715 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU712, video RAM717, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM717 from the character ROM716 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 716 serves as an image data library for storing various image data such as the designs, character images, and background images displayed on the design display device 75. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 716 and have each character ROM 716 store different image data. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 716 to store JPEG format image data for background images stored in the program ROM 713.

Video RAM 717 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75, and the display content of the pattern display device 75 is changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 717.

Here, the configuration related to the variable display of the patterns for each game round and an overview of the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the overview of the display on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75.

The display screen 75a has three pattern rows, left, center, and right, and is provided with a variable display area ME consisting of a left variable display area, a center variable display area, and a right variable display area corresponding to each of these pattern rows. On the display screen 75a, the patterns of each pattern row are displayed as if scrolling in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom) with periodicity. In each variable display area ME, three patterns are displayed in a static state for each pattern row, resulting in a total of nine patterns, 3 x 3, being displayed in a static state.

As shown in (j) to (s) of FIG. 42, the above-mentioned symbols are composed of nine main symbols, which are the numbers "1" to "9," and secondary symbols, which are picture patterns imitating seashells. The main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols," and when the specific symbols are lined up, the game transitions to a special game state, and during the special game state, it becomes easy to score a ball in the favorable ball entry area 314. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols." When the non-specific symbols are lined up, the game transitions to a special game state, but they are differentiated from the specific symbols so that it is substantially difficult to score a ball in the favorable ball entry area 314 during the special game state.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 41, five active lines, namely the top line L1, the middle line L2, the bottom line L3, the left-upward line L4, and the right-upward line L5, are set in the variable display area ME of the display screen 75a. Then, during each game, the variable display of the patterns is stopped in the order of the left pattern row → the right pattern row → the middle pattern row, and when the variable display of all the pattern rows ends with a predetermined combination of patterns (for example, a combination of patterns with the same number) formed on any of the active lines L1 to L5, a jackpot video is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a special jackpot result.

When the above-mentioned reach display is performed, for example, first the display of the changing patterns is terminated in the left changing display area, and then in a state where the display of the changing patterns is terminated in the right changing display area, a reach line is formed by displaying a pattern with the same number attached to at least one of the active lines L1 to L5 as stopped, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, the display of the changing patterns is performed in the middle changing display area, resulting in the reach display. Then, when the open/close execution mode occurs, the same pattern as the pattern forming the reach line is displayed as stopped on the reach line, and the display of the changing patterns in the middle pattern row is terminated.

Although not shown in FIG. 41, the upper left corner of the display screen 75a is provided with a lower operating port variable display area in which a variable display of a pattern corresponding to a play number related to the lower operating port 62a is executed, and the upper right corner of the display screen 75a is provided with a right operating port variable display area in which a variable display of a pattern corresponding to a play number related to the right operating port 63a is executed. The variable display area for the lower operating port is linked to the lower operating port display section DL of the main display section D, and the variable display area for the right operating port is linked to the right operating port display section DR of the main display section D. In the first normal play state, the variable display of the pattern in the variable display area ME is linked to the variable display of the pattern in the variable display area for the lower operating port, and in the second normal play state to the fourth normal play state, the link target is switched so that the variable display of the pattern in the variable display area ME is linked to the variable display of the pattern in the variable display area for the right operating port.

In this embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern on the display screen 75a is determined by the notification/performance control device 143 with reference to a command from the main control device 162, and the details of the display performance are determined by the display control device 710 based on the result. Specifically, in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143, a variable display control process is executed as part of a periodic process that is started at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern is determined in this variable display control process. This variable display control process is broadly divided into a variable display control process for the first normal game state, a variable display control process for the second and third normal game states, and a variable display control process for the fourth normal game state. The basic process flow of these processes is the same. In this embodiment, the configuration related to the variable display control process for the second and third normal game states is distinctive, so the variable display control process for the second and third normal game states will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 43.

(Variable display control process for second/third normal game state)
In the variable display control process for the second/third normal game state, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a game is being played related to the right operating port 63a, that is, whether or not a pattern display (variable display or fixed display) for one game is being executed in the variable display area ME. If it is determined that a game is not being played, the process proceeds to step S1702, where it is determined whether or not a variable start command related to the right operating port has been received from the main control device 162.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1702, the variable display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S1702, the variable display control process is terminated after executing a process to start the variable in step S1703.

Returning to the explanation of step S1701, if a positive determination is made in step S1701, i.e., if it is determined that a game is being played, the process proceeds to step S1704. In step S1704, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the pattern related to the right operating port 63a is being performed in the variable display area ME. If a positive determination is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705.

In step S1705, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation end command related to the right operating port 63a has been received from the main control unit 162. If a negative determination is made in step S1705, then in step S1706, fluctuation in progress processing is executed, and then this fluctuation display control processing is terminated. Fluctuation in progress processing is processing for executing various effects and changing determined effects during the game round started by the fluctuation start processing.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1707, where a process for ending the variation is executed, and then this variation display control process is terminated. In the process for ending the variation, the pattern variation display and the currently being performed presentation are terminated (confirmed display) in accordance with the hold information for the relevant game round. In this process, the speaker unit 29 and lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to perform a presentation corresponding to a confirmed stop. Then, a confirmation command is output to the display control device 710, and this variation end process is terminated. The MPU 712 of the display control device 710 controls the pattern display device 75 to confirm and stop the pattern based on the received confirmation command.

Returning to the explanation of step S1704, if a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1708. In step S1708, a process for displaying the finalized display is executed. Details will be described later, but the process for displaying the finalized display includes a process for updating information corresponding to the currently set setting value.

(Processing for starting fluctuations)
Next, referring to the flowchart of Fig. 44, a supplementary explanation will be given on the process for starting the fluctuation in step S1703 (see Fig. 43). The process for starting the fluctuation is a process executed based on receiving a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162, and the performance for the game round is set/started by this process.

In the process for starting the fluctuation, first, in step S1801, the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and information on the fluctuation display time is identified from the command. Also, as already explained, when a fluctuation start command is sent from the main control device 162, a type command is also sent together. In step S1801, the currently received type command is read, and from the command, information on the game result, such as information on the result of a special jackpot, information on a normal jackpot, information on a special jackpot, and information on a miss result, is identified. Then, in step S1801, the identified information is stored in a register of the MPU 652.

After executing the process of step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802. In step S1802, it is determined whether the game result of the currently starting game round corresponds to a jackpot result, based on the information obtained in step S1801. If it is a jackpot result, that is, if it is a special jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, in the following step S1803, the setting process for the jackpot is executed.

In the jackpot setting process, the stopping result of the jackpot symbols is determined (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, if the result is a special jackpot, the stopping result for this game round is determined to be a combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) (for example, "7", "7", "7" or "1", "1", "1") on one active line L1 to L5, and if the result is a normal jackpot, the stopping result for this game round is determined to be a combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) (for example, "4", "4", "4" or "2", "2", "2") on one active line L1 to L5 (see FIG. 45).

The type of main pattern and the effective lines L1-L5 that are stopped and displayed when a jackpot result occurs are determined randomly by lottery or the like. The final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 store each of the effective lines L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 654. At this time, a process is also executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area. Note that in the following explanation, address information of the stop result determined in the various stop result determination processes is also stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 654.

In addition, in the presentation setting process for the big win, a variable display mode determination process (presentation pattern determination process) is performed to determine the variable display mode of the pattern for the big win. In the case of a big win, the result is notified via a reach display (see FIG. 46). In the variable display mode determination process for the reach display, a variable display pattern table for the reach display stored in various table areas of the ROM 653 is obtained, and a presentation pattern for the reach display corresponding to the variable display time of the currently received variable start command and the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654. In the variable display mode determination process described below, a corresponding variable display pattern table is obtained from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 653 to determine the presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result. Then, the address information of the presentation pattern determined in the presentation pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654.

If it is determined in step S1802 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the current game result corresponds to a special win result. If the result is a loss, a negative determination is made in step S1804 and the process proceeds to step S1805, where the setting process for a loss is executed.

In the setting process for a loss, the stopping result of the losing symbols is determined (stop result determination process is performed). In this stop result determination process, a stopping result in which the same combination of specific symbols and non-specific symbols is not formed on the pay lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stopping result for this game round. Specifically, a symbol combination that results in a reach loss is determined as the stopping result for this game round.

In more detail, a sub-symbol that is one frame away from the symbols that make up the reach line is the final symbol that stops on the reach line, but this sub-symbol is converted in advance into a special symbol, a girl "character" symbol, and the combination of the symbols that make up the reach line and the girl "character" symbol (for example, "7" "girl" "7" or "4" "girl" "4") is determined as the stopping result for this game round (see Figure 45).

In the first and fourth normal game states, the game ball is basically launched toward the right route, and the game progresses mainly with the game rounds related to the right operating port 63a. However, since the game ball can be launched toward the left route during the first and fourth normal game states (a configuration in which a winning ball can enter the lower operating port 62a) and reserved information is carried over, a special winning result can also occur in the first and fourth normal game states. In this way, when a special winning result occurs in the first and fourth normal game states, the conversion to the special symbol described above is not executed, and the same symbol combination that is stopped and displayed as when a losing result occurs is displayed.

In the setting process of step S1805, in addition to the stop result of the losing symbol, the variable display mode of the losing symbol is determined (variable display mode determination process (presentation pattern determination process) is performed). In the case of a losing result in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the result is notified via a reach display (see FIG. 46). In the variable display mode determination process for the reach display, a variable display pattern table for the reach display stored in various table areas of the ROM 653 is obtained, and a presentation pattern of the reach display corresponding to the variable display time of the currently received variation start command and the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654. Note that in the variable display mode determination process shown below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is obtained from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 653 to determine the presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result. Then, the address information of the presentation pattern determined in the presentation pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654.

Returning to the explanation of step S1804, if the game result of the current game round corresponds to a special winning result, a positive determination is made in step S1804 and the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, the setting process for the special winning is executed.

In the special win setting process, the stop result of the special win symbols is determined (stop result determination process is performed). In this stop result determination process, the stop result in which a symbol combination corresponding to a special win is established on the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game. In addition, in the special win effect setting process, the variable display mode of the special win symbols is determined (variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) is performed). When a special win result is obtained in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the result is notified without going through the reach display. Specifically, one of the main symbol and the sub-symbol that are displayed on the effective line is converted to a "V" symbol, which is a special symbol corresponding to the special win result, and the variable display of the symbols is executed so that a symbol combination including the "V" symbol is displayed (see FIG. 45). In other words, in this embodiment, the "V" symbol is displayed in the variable display area ME to clearly indicate that it is a special win result.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when a reach display occurs in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the special win result is denied, and it is determined that the result is either a big win result or a miss result.

After executing any one of the processes in step S1803, step S1805, or step S1806, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, a process is executed in which commands including information on the stop result and presentation pattern determined in step S1803, step S1805, or step S1806 are output to the display control device 710 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 712 of the display control device 710 controls the display of the symbol display device 75 to execute the presentation for the current game round.

After executing the process of step S1807, in the following step S1808, a process for starting the presentation for the game round is executed, and then this process for starting the fluctuation is terminated. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the presentation pattern determined in the above steps S1803, S1805, and S1806, and the presentation for the game round is started.

Here, we will provide additional explanation on the variable display mode of the patterns displayed on the pattern display device 75 (display screen 75a).

(Variable display mode)
The display modes of the changing patterns executed on the display screen 75a are broadly divided into six types: complete miss, which is not compatible with reach display, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C.

In the first normal game state, in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result, the order of likely selections is Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A, and in a game round corresponding to a miss result, the order of likely selections is Complete Miss > Normal Reach A > Normal Reach B > Super Reach A > Super Reach B > Super Reach C.

In contrast, in the second to fourth normal game states, in both the game times corresponding to a jackpot result and a miss result, complete miss, normal reach A, and normal reach B are excluded from execution targets. In the game times corresponding to a jackpot result, the order of likely selection is Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A, and in the game times corresponding to a miss result, the order of likely selection is Super Reach A > Super Reach B > Super Reach C.

Here, the variable display mode of normal reach A and B will be explained. When normal reach A and B are selected, first, the variable display (scroll display) of all the pattern rows that are stopped and displayed is started, then the variable display of the patterns in the left pattern row is ended (stopped and displayed), and further the variable display of the patterns in the right pattern row is ended (stopped and displayed). In this state where the left and right pattern rows are stopped and displayed, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main pattern with the same number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, in a situation where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the middle pattern row is performed, resulting in a reach display (reach variable display). After the reach display is reached, the variable display is ended by stopping and displaying the middle pattern row. Then, the same pattern as the pattern that constitutes the reach display is stopped on the reach line, which notifies the player that a jackpot has been won, and the stopping of the other patterns notifies the player that a loss has been won. In this way, the combination of patterns that is finally stopped and displayed is maintained as it is for a predetermined period of time. In other words, the current game round continues until the stopped display period has elapsed, and once that stopped display period has elapsed, transition to the next game round is permitted.

In this embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between normal reach A and normal reach B is ensured by setting a difference in the variable display time of the middle pattern row after the reach line is formed, but the method for setting the difference between the two is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to ensure the difference in the variable display time by setting a difference in the time from when the variable display begins to when the reach line is formed.

Next, the variable display mode of Super Reach A, B, C will be explained based on the variable display mode of Normal Reach A, B described above. For Super Reach A, B, C, the above-mentioned reach line is formed through the same process as for Normal Reach A, B. After the reach line is formed, a predetermined character is displayed as a video in conjunction with the variable display of the middle pattern row, thereby performing a reach performance. Specifically, in Super Reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern row (the center of the variable display area ME), in Super Reach B, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern row (the center of the variable display area ME), and in Super Reach C, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a monster is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern row (the center of the variable display area ME).

As already explained, in the second and third normal game states, the variable display time of the game turn related to the right operating port 63a is shortened. In the second and third normal game states, a special winning result is obtained in most game turns, and by launching the game ball along the right route, the game can be played in a more advantageous manner for the player than when the game ball is launched along the left route.

Here, the second normal game state and the third normal game state both correspond to high probability modes, and differences are provided so that the probability of a jackpot result increases in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3, and the probability of a miss result increases in the order of setting 3 < setting 2 < setting 1. In other words, differences are provided so that the more advantageous the setting value is for the player, the lower the probability of a miss result.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47(a), setting 1 results in a losing result with a probability of 236/65536, setting 2 results in a losing result with a probability of 136/65536, and setting 3 results in a losing result with a probability of 36/65536. The rate of losing results is smaller than the rate of special winning results and the rate of big winning results, and losing results are rare in the second normal game state and the third normal game state (see FIG. 12).

Here, it is assumed that a player who wishes to play on a gaming machine with settings that are even slightly more advantageous to the player will focus on losing results, which have a large difference in probability of occurring between settings. In this embodiment, an information display area that displays information corresponding to the probability of losing results is provided in a corner (lower right part) of the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75. Below, an overview of the display in the information display area will be explained with reference to Figures 47(b) and 48. Figure 47(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, Figure 48(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the loss probability and effect size, and Figure 48(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the effect size and the expectation of a high setting.

As shown in FIG. 47(b), the character CA is displayed in the character display area CE (information display area). This character CA is basically configured to be displayed at all times from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON until it is turned OFF, regardless of the game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state, first special game state to second special game state).

The character CA is composed of a girl character image and an effect image EF surrounding the character image. While there is one type of character image, there are multiple (three types) effect images EF. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48(a), the effect images EF are broadly divided into an effect image LV1 corresponding to effect level 1, which is the largest, an effect image LV2 corresponding to effect level 2, which is smaller than effect level 1, and an effect image LV3 corresponding to effect level 3, which is smaller than effect level 2 (the smallest), and the character CA is displayed in the character display area CE with any of the effect images LV1 to LV3 added.

The effect images LV1 to LV3 are configured to be switched depending on the game situation in the second normal game state and the third normal game state. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, the number of games played in the second normal game state and the third normal game state (number of games played) and the number of games resulting in a miss (number of misses) in the second normal game state and the third normal game state are cumulatively stored until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the number of games played and the number of misses are used to calculate the miss probability (number of misses/number of games played). For the effect images EF, a miss probability of "0" or more and less than "0.13" (category E1) corresponds to the effect image LV1, a miss probability of "0.13" or more and less than "0.29" (category E2) corresponds to the effect image LV2, and a miss probability of "0.29" or more to "1" or less (category E3) corresponds to the effect image LV3 (see FIG. 48(b)). If the calculated probability of missing falls within category E1, the effect image EF of character CA becomes effect image LV1; if the calculated probability of missing falls within category E2, the effect image EF of character CA becomes effect image LV2; and if the calculated probability of missing falls within category E3, the effect image EF of character CA becomes effect image LV3.

In this embodiment, the triggers for switching the effect image EF are (1) a game round corresponding to a miss result, and (2) a special game state corresponding to a normal jackpot result. Various processes related to the above trigger (1) executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143 will be described below with reference to Figures 49 to 51. Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the first preparation process for updating the related display executed by the MPU 652, Figure 50 is a flowchart showing the process for starting the game round presentation executed by the MPU 652, and Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the first update process for the related display executed by the MPU 652. The processes shown in Figures 49 to 51 are processes executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143 as part of regular processing. The first preparation process for updating the related display is a process included in the setting process (S1805) for a miss in the process for starting the fluctuation (Figure 44), the game round presentation start process is a process executed in step S1808 in the process for starting the fluctuation (Figure 44), and the first process for updating the related display is a process included in the process during fluctuation (S1706) in the process for controlling the fluctuation display (Figure 43).

(First preparation process for updating related display)
As shown in FIG. 49, in the first preparation process for updating the related display, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a losing result. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the game round executed in the second normal game state or the third normal game state corresponds to a losing result. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the first preparation process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, the value of the number of misses counter provided in the various counter area 673 of the RAM 654 is updated (more specifically, it is added by 1). The number of misses counter stores and holds the number of misses (total number) in the second normal game state and the third normal game state until the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is reset (cleared to 0) when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

After executing the update process of the miss counter in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903, where the probability of a miss occurring in the second normal game state and the third normal game state (miss probability) is calculated. Specifically, the game count counter area 672 of the RAM 654 is provided with a special game count counter that stores the total number of games played in the second normal game state and the third normal game state. The value of this special game count counter is updated (more specifically, added by 1) every time a game is started in the second normal game state and the third normal game state. In the process of step S1903, the value of the miss counter is divided by the value of the special game count counter to calculate the miss probability.

In the next step S1904, it is determined whether a change has occurred in the relationship between the above-mentioned categories E1 to E3 and the calculated value of the loss probability. In other words, it is determined whether the previous category and the currently calculated category of the loss probability are different. If it is determined in step S1904 that a change has occurred, in step S1905, a first related display change flag is set in the various flags storage area 674 of RAM 654. Note that this first related display change flag contains information for identifying the category after the change.

After executing the processing of step S1905, or if a negative judgment is made in step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, a precursor display start process is executed to indicate a section change. The precursor display start process is a process for flashing the effect image EF of the character CA after the transition to the reach display.

Then, in step S1907, the effect display update flag is set in the various flag storage area 674 of the RAM 654, and this first preparation process ends.

(Processing for game play performance)
Next, referring to FIG. 50, the game round presentation process will be described. In the game round presentation process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not an effect display update flag is stored in the various flag storage area 674 of the RAM 654. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, a process is performed to start the variable display of all the symbol columns. In other words, if the effect display update flag is not stored, the variable display is started for each of the left symbol column, the center symbol column, and the right symbol column at the start of the game round.

If an effect display update flag is stored in the various flag storage area 674, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, a change delay process is performed. The change delay process is a process for delaying the change display of the center pattern row, which is the final stopped pattern row, at the start timing of a game round. In the following step S2004, a process is executed to start the change display of the left pattern row and the right pattern row.

When the above-mentioned girl "character" pattern is displayed statically on the reach line, the processing of steps S2003 and S2004 above will cause the left and right pattern rows to start changing while the center pattern row remains statically displayed.

(Relation display first update process)
Next, the first related display update process will be described with reference to FIG. 51. In the first related display update process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether it is time to start updating the effect image EF of the character CA in the character display area CE (update start timing). If the determination in step S2101 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S2102. In step S2102, a process is performed to move the special pattern (girl "character" pattern) that is being stopped and displayed for the middle pattern row toward the character display area CE. In the following step S2103, a process is performed to start the variable display of the middle pattern row, and then the first update process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2101, if it is not the timing to start updating, a negative judgment is made in step S2101 and the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, it is determined whether or not it is time to complete the updating and displaying of the effect image EF of the character CA in the character display area CE (update completion timing). If a negative judgment is made in step S2104, the first update process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2104, the process proceeds to step S2105.

In step S2105, it is determined whether or not a first related display change flag is stored in the various flags storage area 674 of RAM 654. If a positive determination is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2106, where a change process is performed on the effect image EF so that it becomes the latest effect level. In other words, if the loss probability category has changed, the effect level is changed to correspond to the category based on the current loss result. In contrast, if a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2107, where a process is performed to maintain the effect level up to that point. In other words, if the loss probability category has not changed, the effect level that was displayed up to that point is carried over, and a change in the effect level is avoided.

(Effect update process)
Here, the flow of updating the effect level occurring during the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of Figures 52 and 53. Although details will be described later, there are cases where the effect image is changed or not changed due to the effect level update, but the display flow up to the branch is basically the same, and it is difficult to identify in advance whether or not there has been a change from the display flow. Note that Figures 52 and 53 show an example where the effect image is changed.

In FIG. 52(a), a game round related to the right operating port 63a has begun in the second normal game state or the third normal game state. This game round corresponds to a miss result, and the miss probability calculated for this game round is included in category E1. Currently, the effect image EF of character CA displayed in the character display area of display screen 75a corresponds to effect level 2, and this miss result will trigger a change in effect level from "2" to "1."

As shown in Fig. 52(a) and Fig. 52(b), when the left and right symbol rows are displayed statically and a reach line is formed by the "7" symbol, the effect image EF of the character CA changes from a lit state to a flashing state. This indicates that the effect level may be changed.

Note that Figures 52 and 53 show examples of game turns that correspond to a miss result, but in game turns that correspond to a jackpot result, the reach display will also be displayed to clearly indicate that a jackpot result has occurred. In this case, too, when transitioning to the reach display, the effect image EF of character CA will switch from a lit display to a flashing display. This is a device to prevent the player from being able to determine in advance whether the current reach display corresponds to a miss result or a jackpot result from the presence or absence of a flashing display, in other words, whether an update of the effect level will occur.

At the timing of transition to the confirmation display, as shown in FIG. 52(c), a different symbol from the symbols forming the reach line is displayed frozen on the reach line, specifically the special symbol mentioned above (the girl "character" symbol). This clearly indicates to the player that this game round corresponds to a losing result. For this special symbol, an image similar to the character CA displayed in the character display area is used. The special symbol is also composed of a character image and an effect image, and like the character CA, the effect image has three effect levels. In the example shown in FIG. 52(c) and (d), the effect level of the character CA is "2", and the effect level of the special symbol is also "2".

During the confirmation display after the special symbol is frozen, the effect of the special symbol begins to be enlarged or reduced. This is a device to draw the player's attention to the special symbol, and suggests that the effect level of the character CA may be updated by this enlargement or reduction. Note that the character portion of the special symbol is not subject to the enlargement or reduction.

When the current game round ends and the next game round begins, the left and right pattern rows begin to change (scroll) as shown in Figure 53(e). Then, as shown in Figure 53(f), the special pattern that had been displayed as still stopped moves from its stop position in the center of the screen toward the character display area while shrinking as a whole. At the same time, the middle pattern row begins to change (scroll).

The special symbol will be hidden when it reaches a position where it overlaps with the displayed character CA, and accordingly the effect level of the character CA will be changed from "2" to "1" (see Figure 53 (e)). Note that if the miss probability category is changed from E2 to E1, the effect level will be changed from "2" to "3", and if there is no change in the miss probability category the effect level will remain at "2".

The next play round corresponds to a special win result. In this play round, as shown in Figure 53(f) → Figure 53(e), all the symbol rows are displayed simultaneously without going through the reach display. At this time, a "V" symbol is displayed on the winning line, indicating that a special win has occurred.

As shown in (2) above, in this embodiment, the effect level of the character CA may be updated even when a special game state corresponding to a normal jackpot result is entered. Various processes related to the above trigger (2) executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143 will be described below with reference to Figs. 54 to 55. Fig. 54 is a flowchart showing the related display update second preparation process executed by the MPU 652, and Fig. 55 is a flowchart showing the related display second update process executed by the MPU 652. Each process shown in Figs. 54 to 55 is a process executed as part of the regular process by the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143. The related display update second preparation process is a process included in the setting process for a jackpot (S1803) of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 44), and the related display second update process is a process executed during the first special game state.

(Second preparation process for updating related display)
As shown in FIG. 54, in the second preparation process for updating the related display, first, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the normal jackpot result. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the game round executed in the second normal game state or the third normal game state corresponds to the normal jackpot result. In other words, it is determined whether or not the game round is one in which the transition from the second normal game state or the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state is confirmed. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the second preparation process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202.

In step S2202, the probability of a miss occurring in the second normal game state and the third normal game state (miss probability) is calculated. Specifically, in the game count counter area 672 of the RAM 654, the miss probability is calculated by dividing the value of the miss count counter by the value of the special game count counter.

In the next step S2203, it is determined whether a change has occurred in the relationship between the above-mentioned categories E1 to E3 and the calculated value of the loss probability. In other words, it is determined whether the previous category and the currently calculated category of the loss probability are different. If it is determined in step S2203 that a change has occurred, in step S2204 a second related display change flag is set in the various flags storage area 674 of RAM 654. Note that this second related display change flag includes information for identifying the category after the change.

After executing the processing of step S2204, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2203, this second preparation processing ends.

(Relation display second update process)
Next, the second related display update process will be described with reference to Fig. 55. In the second related display update process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the ending in the first special game state. If a negative determination is made in step S2301, the second related display update process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2302.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not a second related display change flag is stored in the various flags storage area 674 of RAM 654. If a positive determination is made in step S2202, a process of changing the effect image EF is performed so that it becomes the latest effect level. In other words, if the classification of the loss probability has changed, the effect level is changed to correspond to the classification based on the current loss result. In contrast, if a negative determination is made in step S2302, the process proceeds to step S2304, and a process of maintaining the effect level up to that point is performed. In other words, if the classification of the loss probability has not changed, the effect level that was displayed up to that point is carried over, and a change in the effect level is avoided.

In this way, when the game state transitions from the second normal game state or the third normal game state to the fourth normal game state via the first special game state, the effect level is updated based on the information accumulated in the second normal game state and the third normal game state. Then, the character CA continues to be displayed in the character display area CE even after the transition to the second normal game state.

The display of the character CA in the character display area CE continues regardless of the game state, but the game states in which the effect level can be updated (changed) are limited to some of them. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the effect level cannot be updated in the first normal game state, can be updated in the second normal game state, can be updated in the third normal game state, can be updated in the fourth normal game state, can be updated in the first special game state only when a normal jackpot result is achieved in the second normal game state or the third normal game state, and cannot be updated in the second special game state.

When the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the game state before the power was turned off will be retained unless a reset operation is performed. However, the various counters used to calculate the loss probability described above are cleared to 0 when the power is turned off. Taking this into consideration, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the character CA is displayed with a provisional effect level of "1."

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment, even in the first normal game state, the launch of the game ball toward the right route is not prohibited, and the game ball may continue to be launched toward the right route to win the right operation port 63a. Even in the first normal game state, there is a possibility that the game round related to the right operation port 63a will result in a loss. For example, as shown in FIG. 56(b), if a win occurs in the right operation port 63a in the first normal game state and a loss occurs in the game round related to the win, it cannot be denied that the actual loss probability may change beyond the classification (see the two-dot chain line). However, as described above, the effect level cannot be updated in the first normal game state, and further, various counters for calculating the loss probability are not updated. Therefore, after the transition to the first normal game state, the effect level at the time of the transition to the first normal game state is carried over at least until the end of the first normal game state.

The first embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The second normal game state corresponds to the high probability mode, so it is expected that a jackpot result will be obtained early, but in some cases, the game may proceed without a jackpot result due to bad luck. If the game proceeds without a jackpot result and the support mode switches to the low frequency support mode despite the high expectation of a jackpot result, there is a concern that the player's motivation to play will decrease significantly. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, if the number of games reaches a reference number in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode without a winning result, the game transitions to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode upon reaching the reference number. The third normal game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state, and it is possible to proceed with the game even more advantageously by upgrading to the third normal game state. By providing relief to the player with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play.

Specifically, in the third normal game state, the frequency of opening the right operating port 63a decreases, so that the number of game balls that pass through the right operating port 63a increases, and most of the game balls that pass through the right operating port 63a enter the lower large winning port 341. In other words, although the winning probability of the entire ball entry unit 70 hardly changes, the distribution of winning destinations changes, and the number of winning balls into the lower large winning port 341 increases. The lower large winning port 341 is favored so that the number of winning balls is greater than that of the right operating port 63a, and as a result, the number of benefits (prize balls) obtained with the same investment is greater than in the second normal game state. Specifically, as described above, in the second normal game state, the number of balls held gradually decreases as the game progresses, while in the third normal game state, the number of balls held gradually increases as the game progresses. The third normal game state continues at least until the next big win result occurs, and it is a chance to increase the number of balls held.

The third normal game state is also configured to require a slightly shorter time to play than the second normal game state, preventing inconveniences such as slow game progress even when the second special game state is repeatedly entered.

In the third normal game state, the lower large winning opening 341 is opened when a ball enters the right actuation opening 63a. Although the probability of winning at the right actuation opening 63a is lower than in the second normal game state, the decrease in the winning probability is suppressed to a level that allows sufficient acquisition of reserved information related to the right actuation opening 63a. In other words, the inconvenience of a decrease in the frequency with which the lower large winning opening 341 opens due to a decrease in the probability of winning at the right actuation opening 63a is suppressed.

In most cases where a jackpot result occurs during the third normal game state (excluding 2R normal jackpot results and 16R special jackpot results), the game state will transition to the second normal game state, preventing the rescue function described above from becoming excessive. However, even if the game state is demoted from the third normal game state, if the transition destination is the second normal game state, the game state can transition back to the third normal game state, so it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from suddenly decreasing due to demotion from the third normal game state.

During the third game state, the right route is favored over the left route to give the player an advantage, so it is assumed that the game ball will mainly be launched to the right route. The game ball launched to the right route is prevented from entering the lower operating port 62a and enters the right operating port 63a. Here, the number of time-saving times set when a jackpot result is obtained in the game round related to the right operating port 63a is biased so that it is generally smaller than the number of time-saving times set when a jackpot result is obtained in the game round related to the lower operating port 62a. For this reason, when a jackpot result is obtained in the third normal game state, the game state is demoted to the second normal game state as a result of the jackpot result, but the number of time-saving times reset is favorably set to be relatively small. As a result, the hurdle for activating the rescue function is lower in the second normal game state transitioned from the third normal game state than in the second normal game state transitioned from the first normal game state. This is a device to mitigate the decrease in motivation to play that accompanies the end of the third normal game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a 2R normal jackpot result is obtained in the third normal game state, the game state transitions to the first normal game state and the number of time-saving times is set to 50 times, and if a 2R special jackpot result is obtained in the third normal game state, the game state transitions to the second normal game state and the number of time-saving times is also set to 50 times. In each of these normal game states, the display effects on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 and the background music output from the speaker unit 29 are common, making it difficult to identify which normal game state is in the state from the outside. For this reason, it is unclear whether the game state will be promoted to the third normal game state or demoted to the first normal game state until the set number of time-saving times is consumed. In this way, even if the same number of time-saving times is set, the game state after the number of time-saving times is consumed is divided into advantageous and unfavorable depending on the game state, which can suppress monotony of the game and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

As described above, in a configuration in which the game state can change to an advantageous/disadvantageous side depending on the number of times the time-saving feature is used up, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the number of times remaining until the time-saving feature is used up. In this way, if the number of balls decreases significantly under circumstances in which attention to the game is increasing, it is expected that this, combined with the increased attention to the game, will likely lead to a decrease in motivation to play. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suppressed by corresponding the high-frequency support mode to both the fourth normal game state to which a transition is made in response to a 2R normal jackpot result and the second normal game state to which a transition is made in response to a 2R special jackpot result and suppressing the decrease in the number of balls.

In addition, in a configuration in which the game state changes as the number of time-saving times is consumed, there is a concern that the game progress may become protracted during this process, reducing the impact and hindering the effect of increasing attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, the game progress up to the time-saving number is consumed is smoothed by shortening the variable display time, etc., so that such concerns can be suitably dispelled.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the game state is divided into advantageous and unfavorable depending on the number of times the time-saving feature has been used, it is expected that the attention to the game will be increased, but there is a concern that the time until the number of times the time-saving feature has been used will be extended, which will increase the player's fatigue. In this regard, the above-mentioned configuration, which aims to smooth the progress of the game, is advantageous in reducing the length of time the game takes and shortening the process until the number of times the time-saving feature has been used, thereby reducing the player's fatigue. It is also preferable to set a relatively large number of times the time-saving feature will cause branching.

When comparing the second normal game state with the fourth normal game state, the former corresponds to a high probability mode, while the latter corresponds to a low probability mode. Therefore, even if it is difficult to distinguish which game state it is because the display effects are standardized as described above, it is possible to contribute to diversifying the game by providing a difference in the chances of winning during that game state.

As described above, after the first normal game state transitions to the second normal game state via the first special game state, the number of times the game has been played in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit (time-saving number of times), and the game transitions to the third normal game state, which is more advantageous to the player. The upper limit includes "100 times," "70 times," "50 times," "30 times," and "10 times," and the hurdle for transitioning to the third normal game state differs depending on which upper limit is set. In other words, there will be a second normal game state that is easy to transition to the third normal game state and a second normal game state that is difficult to transition to the third normal game state. In this way, by diversifying the second normal game state and providing multiple hurdles for transitioning to the third normal game state, it is possible to suppress monotony in the game in the normal game state and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

In order to enhance the variety of play while preventing excessive bias in the degree of advantage, it is preferable to set the upper limit somewhat high and reduce the probability of reaching the upper limit. However, on the other hand, if the upper limit is set too high, the play until the upper limit is reached may become protracted or the impression that it is practically impossible to reach may be strengthened, which may result in a lack of effectiveness in increasing interest in the game through diversification of the game. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, if the lottery mode in the second normal play state is specified to be a high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the upper limit from being reached too frequently even if the upper limit is set low, and therefore the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above can be suitably prevented.

The transition (promotion) to the third normal game state is accompanied by a certain degree of tension, and if this tension continues for an excessively long period of time, it can cause the player to become fatigued. Therefore, by setting an upper limit on the number of games that can be played based on a ball entering the right actuation port 63a in the second normal game state and configuring the second normal game state to make it easier to enter the right actuation port 63a, the game can be progressed quickly. This can increase the attention paid to the game while reducing the fatigue caused by it.

In addition, by configuring the second normal game state so that the time for which the symbols change is displayed is shorter than that in the first normal game state, the game can be progressed more quickly. This can increase the attention paid to the game while reducing the fatigue caused by it.

In particular, when combined with the high frequency support mode, the variable display time is shortened in conjunction with the increased frequency of balls entering the right operating port 63a, allowing smooth play in the second normal game state, which is played in anticipation of reaching the upper limit. This allows the fatigue relief effect to be exerted even more optimally.

For players who have experienced using up the time-saving number of times in the fourth normal game state without winning the lottery for transitioning to the first special game state, it is possible to give the impression that reaching the upper limit is realistic when the game enters the second normal game state. With this configuration, it is expected that the attention paid to the game when transitioning to the second normal game state will increase.

If a jackpot result is obtained during the second normal game state, the game will transition to the first special game state, and after the first special game state ends, the game will branch into two cases: returning to the second normal game state, or transitioning to the fourth normal game state (being demoted). This makes it possible to effectively prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Even if a jackpot result is obtained while playing in the second normal game state, aiming for the upper limit, there is a possibility of returning to the second normal game state again. When the game returns to the second normal game state, a new upper limit is set, allowing the player to try again to transition to the third normal game state. This makes it possible to effectively prevent a decrease in motivation to play caused by transitioning to the first special game state.

The transition conditions for transitioning from the second normal game state to the most advantageous third normal game state may be relaxed if a jackpot result occurs in the second normal game state, and the game returns to the second normal game state via a special game state. In this way, if the hurdle to transition to the third normal game state is lowered when the second normal game state is looped, the effect of suppressing monotony in gameplay by using multiple normal game states in combination can be preferably exerted.

As shown in this embodiment, in a gaming machine in which a jackpot result is the trigger for transition (demotion) from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the player plays in the hope that a jackpot result will not occur in the second normal gaming state. Here, when a jackpot result occurs, the player may be demoted to the first normal gaming state, but may also return to the second normal gaming state and the conditions for transition to the third normal gaming state may be relaxed. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a rapid decline in the player's motivation to play when a jackpot result occurs in the second normal gaming state.

When a winning result is obtained in the second normal game state, the hurdle to the third normal game state is not necessarily lowered, but may be raised, which adds tension to the game.

In a configuration in which the game progresses in the order of first normal game state → second normal game state → third normal game state, if there are many occurrences of a jackpot result that delays the transition to the third normal game state despite the transition to the second normal game state, the game in the second normal game state tends to seem drawn out. This can be an obstacle to increasing attention to the game. Here, as shown in this embodiment, by making the rate at which the hurdle is lowered higher than the rate at which the hurdle is raised when a jackpot result is achieved during the second normal game state, it is possible to use multiple normal game states in combination while making the step-up of the game state smooth.

When the game ball is launched to the left route in the first normal game state, a jackpot lottery is executed based on the ball entering the lower operating port 62a. If the lottery results in a jackpot and the game moves to the second normal game state, a transition condition (number of time-saving times) that is relatively difficult to achieve is likely to be set. In contrast, after the transition to the second normal game state, the game ball is launched to the right route, and the main ball entry destination of the game ball is the right operating port 63a. If a jackpot lottery is executed based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a, a jackpot result is obtained, and the game returns to the second normal game state via the first special game state, a transition condition (number of time-saving times) that is relatively easy to achieve is likely to be set. With this configuration, the various technical ideas described above can be suitably embodied while avoiding the complication of the configuration by utilizing the existing configuration of the game machine.

In the ball entry unit 70 shown in this embodiment, the time required for a game ball flowing down the right route to pass over the shutter 331 (specific area SE1) of the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is longer than the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time of the image on the through gate display section DS during the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, most of the game balls that reach the ball entry unit 70 (right-side operating ball entry section 63) during the high-frequency support mode will enter the right operating port 63a. In other words, game balls launched to the right route during the high-frequency support mode flow into the right operating port 63a and are suppressed from entering the lower large winning port 341. On the other hand, the above-mentioned required time is shorter than the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time in the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, even if the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is continuously switched to the receiving state during the low-frequency support mode, some of the game balls that reach the shutter 331 pass through the right-side operating ball entry section 63 and head toward the lower large winning port 341. In this way, during high frequency support mode, balls entering the lower large winning opening 341 are suppressed, while during low frequency support mode, balls entering the lower large winning opening 341 are increased, resulting in a clear difference in the progress of the game.

Here, in order to differentiate between the support modes, the above-mentioned variable display time and fixed display time can be shortened to reduce the number of game balls (spills) that pass through the right operating port 63a and head toward the lower large winning port 341 during the low-frequency support mode. However, simply shortening these times makes it difficult to launch/stop balls according to the results displayed on the through gate display unit DS (to advance the game in a way that gives the player even the slightest advantage), and the significance of providing the through gate display unit DS is diminished. In this regard, the configuration shown in this embodiment makes it possible to prevent the variable display time and fixed display time on the through gate display unit DS from becoming extremely short while suppressing the above-mentioned spills. This makes it possible to preferably increase the attention paid to the game.

In a configuration in which balls entering the lower large winning opening 341 are given preferential treatment over balls entering the right operating opening 63a, it is assumed that players play in the hope of balls entering the lower large winning opening 341. In such a configuration, excessive balls entering the lower large winning opening 341 is undesirable because it can cause the game to lose balance. In this regard, since it is possible to avoid the movement of game balls toward the lower large winning opening 341 while keeping the time that the right operating ball entry section 63 is in the receiving state as short as possible, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. And, shortening the time in the receiving state is advantageous in encouraging the player's expectation that the game balls will flow down toward the lower large winning opening 341, and it is possible to suitably suppress the reduction in the expectation of balls entering the lower large winning opening 341 due to the time in the receiving state being extended.

By making the passage length of the intermediate passage section 323 connecting the right-side actuating ball entry section 63 and the lower variable entry device 65 shorter than the passage length relating to the specific area SE1, it becomes easier to give the player the impression that if a game ball that reaches the right-side actuating ball entry section 63 can pass through the right-side actuating ball entry section 63 while the lower variable entry device 65 is open, it can immediately enter the first ball entry section, which contributes to increasing attention to the shutter 331 of the right-side actuating ball entry section 63 and the behavior of the game ball that reaches the right-side actuating ball entry section 63.

Since most of the game balls that flow into the ball entry unit 70 can enter either the right operating port 63a or the lower large winning port 341, it is possible to make it appear as if one large ball entry section is constructed by the combination of the right operating port 63a and the lower large winning port 341. Making it appear as if the large ball entry section ensures opportunities for game balls to enter is advantageous in improving the player's satisfaction. Here, by making the passage length of the intermediate passage section 323 shorter than the passage length of the passage sections (specific areas SE1, SE2) formed by each shutter, the sense of unity between both ball entry sections (the right operating port 63a and the lower large winning port 341) can be strengthened. This can strengthen the above impression.

In this type of large ball entry section, when the main ball entry destination is switched between the right operating port 63a/lower large winning port 341 depending on the situation, the possibility of the game hall suffering a disadvantage increases if a ball enters the lower large winning port 341 in a situation where a ball should not enter the lower large winning port 341. In consideration of such circumstances, there is a technical significance in providing a communication passage (middle passage section 323) between the lower large winning port 341 and the right operating port 63a to delay or thin out the movement of game balls toward the lower large winning port 341. Although these functions can be optimally performed by making the middle passage section 323 somewhat longer, on the other hand, there is a concern that the sense of unity between the two ball entry sections (right operating port 63a and lower large winning port 341) will be reduced, weakening the impression that they are one large ball entry section. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, the shutters of both ball entry sections (right operating port 63a and lower large winning port 341) are each tilted downward to the left and the middle passage section 323 extends in a direction intersecting the tilt direction, and the positions of the ball entry sections (right operating port 63a and lower large winning port 341) are offset vertically, thereby increasing the passage length of the middle passage section 323 while reducing the loss of unity between both ball entry sections (right operating port 63a and lower large winning port 341).

Game balls that flow into the discharge passage provided midway through the intermediate passage section 323 are discharged directly from the game area PE, avoiding reaching the lower large winning opening 341. By configuring some of the game balls that pass through the right-side operating ball entry section 63 to be discharged from the game area PE without flowing into the lower large winning opening 341 in this way, the impression that it is the large ball entry section described above can be strengthened compared to a configuration in which game balls that flow into the intermediate passage section 323 head toward the outlet 68.

In a configuration in which the lower large winning opening 341 is favored over the right operating opening 63a to give the player an advantage, the launch operation is performed in the hope that the game ball will pass through the right operating opening 63a and head toward the lower large winning opening 341, and it is assumed that the player's attention will be drawn more easily to the movement of the game ball from the right operating opening 63a to the intermediate passage section 323. Here, in a configuration in which a deceleration section (protrusion sections 335a, 336a) is provided in the passage section (specific area SE1) formed by the shutter 331 to extend the time required for passage, the deceleration section is arranged so as to be biased toward the intermediate passage section 323, making it easier for the player to follow the movement of the game ball with their eyes in the area where the player's attention is likely to be drawn. This can contribute to further increasing the attention.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the setting value, so one of the fun things about playing is guessing the setting value. When the game ball is shot to the right route in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the rate of failure is lower than when the game ball is shot to the left route in the first normal game state, and the difference (setting difference) between the rate of failure is larger than in the first normal game state. In other words, the second normal game state and the third normal game state are advantageous in guessing the setting value. Here, in this embodiment, the variable display time is shortened by transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state, and the game progress is accelerated, thereby suppressing monotony of the game. By performing such a shortening, if a failure result is overlooked, the accuracy of the setting value guess is greatly reduced. In this regard, as described above, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by making the variable display time in a game that results in a loss in the second normal game state and the third normal game state longer than the variable display time in a game that results in a loss in the first normal game state. This can suitably contribute to increasing attention to the game.

In most game times in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the special winning result is obtained. There is a concern that the aforementioned effect of increasing attention will not be fully achieved if game times with a losing result are mixed in with game times with a special winning result. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, the variable display time in game times corresponding to a losing result is made longer than the variable display time in game times corresponding to a special winning result, thereby differentiating the two, and the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably alleviated.

In the first embodiment, the variable display time table referred to when determining the variable display time in a game round resulting in a miss in the second normal game state and the third normal game state and the variable display time table referred to when determining the variable display time in a game round resulting in a jackpot in the second normal game state and the third normal game state are the same variable display time table, and a difference in the variable display time between a game round corresponding to a miss result and a game round corresponding to a jackpot result is avoided in the second normal game state and the third normal game state. By configuring the game so that a jackpot result or a miss result is determined when a long fluctuation (reach display) occurs in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, it is possible to appropriately increase the attention to the game when a long fluctuation occurs. This is also a preferable configuration in terms of preventing miss results from being overlooked.

When the reach display is executed, the player's attention to the game is likely to be heightened. Therefore, as shown in the first embodiment above, if the reach display is configured to be executed for all game times that result in a losing outcome in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, it is possible to more effectively prevent losing outcomes from being overlooked.

As described above, in a configuration in which the setting value can be estimated from the actual failure probability (proportion of failure results) in the second and third normal game states, there is a concern that the accuracy of the setting estimation will be significantly reduced due to a reduction in the number of samples caused by missing the failure results, etc. Therefore, as shown in the first embodiment above, if the effect level of the character CA residing in the character display area CE of the display screen 75a is updated according to the actual failure probability, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to grasp the failure probability etc. after the fact even if he or she is not aware of the number of times a failure result has occurred, and it is possible to preferably exert the effect of increasing attention to the game as described above.

The update of the effect level of character CA is basically limited to cases where a losing result occurs in the second normal game state and the third normal game state. By limiting the opportunities for updating in this way, it is possible to create a slight difference in the correlation (likelihood) between the effect level and the actual probability of a losing result during periods when no updates are being made and immediately after an update. This can increase attention to whether or not the effect level will be updated when a losing result occurs.

A difference (setting difference) between the set values is set for the probability of a losing result in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, and the effect level of the character CA is changed based on the fact that a losing result has occurred in the second normal game state and the third normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to estimate the setting value of this gaming machine from the effect level in the second normal game state and the third normal game state. A losing result tends to attract less attention from players than a jackpot result. By being able to estimate the setting value from the probability of a losing result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's attention even for play times related to a losing result.

In addition, since the second and third normal game states are more favorable to the player than the first normal game state, there is a possibility that the transition to the first normal game state will be the trigger for the player to end the game. In other words, it is assumed that most of the candidates when selecting a machine at an amusement hall will be in the first normal game state. Here, the effect image EF of the character CA described above continues to be displayed so that the effect level at the transition to the first normal game state is carried over. With this configuration, the effect level of the character CA can be used as an indicator when selecting a machine from among gaming machines in the first normal game state. This is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

After transitioning to the second normal game state and the third normal game state, updates (changes) to the effect level of the character CA are restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the reliability of the estimation of the setting value based on the effect level from changing depending on the time that has passed since transitioning to the first normal game state, the number of times the game has been played, etc. This is preferable, for example, in terms of ensuring fairness between players.

A player who wishes to guess the set value may launch a game ball toward the right route even in the first normal game state. However, launching a game ball toward the right route in the first normal game state may be disadvantageous to the player. As shown in the first embodiment above, there is a technical significance in that the configuration does not update (change) the effect level even if such an action results in the ball entering the right operating port 63a and then missing, as this reduces disadvantages to the player.

In a configuration in which multiple pieces of reserved information are stored and a winning/losing lottery is performed sequentially for the reserved information, a discrepancy may occur between the timing at which the reserved information is acquired and the timing at which the lottery (game round) is performed. Therefore, as shown in the first embodiment above, if the number of game rounds performed based on balls entering (balls entering the right operating port 63a) during the second/third normal game state and the number of losing results that occurred based on balls entering (balls entering the right operating port 63a) during the second/third normal game state are stored, and the effect level is updated (changed) based on these stored numbers, it is possible to suitably prevent the reliability of the setting value suggestion function based on the effect level from decreasing due to the above-mentioned timing discrepancy.

In the first embodiment described above, the number of plays and the number of losses in the second/third normal game state are stored and maintained even when the game state is changed to another state, and the number of plays and the number of losses executed after the game state is changed to the second/third normal game state again are cumulatively stored. With this configuration, players who have a favorable expectation of the reliability of the setting value suggestion by the effect level can be encouraged to continue playing even after the game state is changed to the first normal game state.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the effect level of the character CA on the symbol display device 75 (display screen 75a) is updated in accordance with the actual loss probability in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, but the specific configuration for notifying the player of information corresponding to the actual loss probability is arbitrary. For example, the notification may be performed by changing the light-emitting color or the number of lights emitted in a light-emitting unit such as an LED in accordance with the actual loss probability, or the notification may be performed by changing the background music or sound effects in the speaker unit 29 in accordance with the actual loss probability.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment described above, the effect level of the character CA is updated in the next game turn following a losing result (more specifically, at the beginning of the next game turn), but it is also possible to change this and configure the effect level to be updated during the game turn relating to the losing result (for example, while the confirmation display is being performed).

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, in a game round resulting in a loss in the second or third normal game state (a game round related to the right operating port 63a), the loss result is always indicated via a super reach, but instead of or in addition to this, in a game round resulting in a loss in the second or third normal game state (a game round related to the right operating port 63a), the loss result can be indicated via a normal reach. Also, in a game round resulting in a loss in the second or third normal game state (a game round related to the right operating port 63a), the loss result can be indicated without going through a reach display.

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment, the effect level of the character CA can be updated in both the second normal game state and the third normal game state, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to allow the effect level to be updated in the third normal game state, while disallowing the effect level to be updated in the second normal game state. In such a configuration, it is possible to allow the update of various counters for calculating the probability of losing in the second normal game state, and disallow only the update of the effect level, or to disallow both the update of various counters for calculating the probability of losing and the update of the effect level.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment, the effect level of the character CA displayed in the character display area CE is updated in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, and then passed on to the first normal game state via the special game state and the fourth normal game state. It is sufficient that the effect level updated in the second normal game state and the third normal game state is passed on to the first normal game state, and it is not necessarily necessary to pass on the display of the character CA (effect image EF) in the special game state and the fourth normal game state. For example, it is also possible to make the character CA invisible during the special game state and the fourth normal game state, and to resume display of the character CA after transition to the first normal game state.

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment, the effect level of the character CA is not updated during the fourth normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to update the effect level in the fourth normal game state. However, unlike the second and third normal game states, the lottery mode for the fourth normal game state corresponds to the low probability mode. Therefore, the probability of a miss occurring is higher than in the high probability mode. In consideration of such circumstances, it is preferable to provide a difference between the increment mode of the miss counter when a miss occurs in the fourth normal game state and the increment mode of the miss counter when a miss occurs in the second and third normal game states (it is preferable to weight the increment mode). For example, when the lottery table for winning or losing is configured so that the miss probability in the low probability mode is twice that in the high probability mode, it is preferable to increment the miss counter by one every time a miss occurs twice in the low probability mode.

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment, in the first normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the effect level cannot be updated and the various counters for calculating the probability of losing cannot be updated, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the first normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the effect level may be updated while the various counters for calculating the probability of losing may be updated. In such a configuration, when a losing result occurs in the second normal game state or the third normal game state or when a normal jackpot result occurs, the effect level may be updated taking into account information such as the number of losses accumulated in the first normal game state or the fourth normal game state.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, the effect level of the character is updated when a losing result occurs in the second normal game state or the third normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect level may be updated when a preset number of game rounds are played in the second normal game state or the third normal game state, or a separate lottery for updating may be performed for each game round to determine whether or not to update the effect level.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment, when a normal jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state or the third normal game state, that is, when a transition to the fourth normal game state is confirmed, the effect level of the character CA is updated at the ending of the first special game state corresponding to the normal jackpot result, but it is sufficient that the effect level is updated by the end of the first special game state, and the specific timing is arbitrary. For example, the effect level may be updated in the game round corresponding to the normal jackpot result, or the effect level may be updated during the opening or round play of the first special game state.

<Modification 10>
In the above first embodiment, when a normal jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state or the third normal game state, i.e., when a transition to the fourth normal game state is confirmed, the effect level of the character CA is updated in the first special game state corresponding to the normal jackpot result, but this update function can also be omitted.

<Modification 11>
In the first embodiment, a correlation is provided between the pattern (special pattern) displayed in the variable display area ME and the update of the effect level of the character CA, and the special pattern (girl "character" pattern) displayed in the variable display area ME indicates that the effect level of the character CA may be updated, but this can be modified as follows. For example, the correlation can be further strengthened by providing a red effect and a blue effect as special pattern effects, and by configuring the red effect to be equal to or higher than the current effect level, and the blue effect to have the possibility of lowering the current effect level.

<Modification 12>
In the first embodiment, a short variation occurs when a special winning result occurs in the second normal game state and the third normal game state (see FIG. 46, etc.), but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the special winning result in the third normal game state to be a short variation, while the special winning result in the second normal game state to not be a short variation (for example, to be a middle variation).

<Modification 13>
As shown in FIG. 31, in the first embodiment, in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, when the game number related to the right operation port 63a is a miss result, the display time of the pattern change in the right operation port display unit DR is set to 30 to 40 sec (long change) (the reach display is executed), but this is not limited to this. When the game number is a miss result in the fourth normal game state, the effect level of the character CA is not updated based on the miss result. In other words, unlike the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the significance of emphasizing the miss result is reduced. In view of this situation, when the game number related to the right operation port 63a is a miss result in the fourth normal game state, the display time of the pattern change in the right operation port display unit DR may be set to 1 sec (short change) or 30 to 40 sec (long change), which may promote smooth progress of the game in the fourth normal game state. Furthermore, in the fourth normal game state, if the game turn related to the right operating port 63a results in a miss, the game progress may be made even smoother by setting the time for displaying the changing pattern in the right operating port display section DR to 1 sec (short change).

<Modification 14>
In the above first embodiment, the variable display time table referred to when determining the variable display time in the game round resulting in a loss in the second normal game state and the third normal game state and the variable display time table referred to when determining the variable display time in the game round resulting in a jackpot in the second normal game state and the third normal game state are the same variable display time table, but this is not limited to this. A variable display time table referred to when determining the variable display time in the game round resulting in a loss in the second normal game state and the third normal game state and a variable display time table referred to when determining the variable display time in the game round resulting in a jackpot in the second normal game state and the third normal game state may be provided separately.

<Modification 15>
In the above first embodiment, the configuration is such that a special winning result does not occur in a game play related to the lower actuation port 62a, but the configuration may be such that a special winning result can occur in a game play related to the lower actuation port 62a.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the probability of losing in the second normal game state and the third normal game state is set to a large difference between the settings (settings 1 to 3), and the effect level of the character CA displayed in the character display area CE is changed according to the probability of losing in the second normal game state and the third normal game state. This effect level is carried over to the first normal game state in a manner that makes it impossible to update, so that the player can use the effect level of the character CA as one element (criteria) for machine selection. However, when estimating the setting value from the effect level, the influence of variation is large, and the reliability of the setting estimation is not very high. In this embodiment, one of the features is that the character CA is used to suggest a highly reliable setting value in a manner different from the suggestion by the effect level. Specifically, while the suggestion by the character CA is always made, the characteristic suggestion in this embodiment is temporary with a limited execution period. In the following explanation, the former is distinguished as a "constant suggestion" and the latter as a "temporary suggestion", and the configuration related to the "temporary suggestion" will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

As part of the periodic processing, the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143 executes variable display control processing corresponding to the first normal game state, the second/third normal game state, and the fourth normal game state. The variable display control processing for the first normal game state will be described below.

(Variable display control process for first normal game state)
In the variable display control process for the first normal game state, first, it is determined whether or not a game turn related to the lower operation port 62a is in progress, i.e., whether or not a pattern display (variable display or fixed display) for one game turn is being executed in the variable display area ME. If it is determined that a game turn is not in progress, it is determined whether or not a variable start command related to the lower operation port 62a has been received from the main control device 162. If a variable start command related to the lower operation port 62a has not been received, this variable display control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a variable start command related to the lower operation port 62a has been received, this variable display control process is terminated after executing a variable start process corresponding to the first normal game state.

Returning to the explanation at the beginning, if it is determined that the game is not currently playing related to the lower operation port 62a, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the pattern related to the lower operation port 62a is being performed in the variable display area ME. If it is determined that the variable display of the pattern related to the lower operation port 62a is being performed, it is determined whether or not a variable end command related to the lower operation port 62a has been received from the main control device 162. If a variable end command has not been received, the variable during processing corresponding to the first normal game state is executed, and then this variable display control processing is terminated. This variable during processing is processing for executing various effects and changing the determined effects during the game play started by the above-mentioned variable start processing.

If a change end command has been received, this change display control process is terminated after executing a change end process corresponding to the first normal game state. In this change end process, the change display of the patterns and the currently being performed are terminated (determined display) in accordance with the hold information related to the game round. In this process, the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to perform a performance corresponding to a fixed stop. Then, after outputting a fixed command to the display control device 710, this change end process is terminated. The MPU 712 of the display control device 710 controls the pattern display device 75 to fix and stop the patterns based on the received fixed command. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change display of the patterns related to the lower operating port 62a is not being performed in the change display area ME, a fixed display process corresponding to the first normal game state is executed.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 57, we will provide additional information about the process for starting fluctuations corresponding to the first normal gaming state. The process for starting fluctuations corresponding to the first normal gaming state is a process that is executed based on receiving a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162, and this process sets/starts the presentation for the gaming round.

(Processing for starting fluctuation corresponding to the first normal gaming state)
In the process for starting the fluctuation, first, in step S2401, the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and from the command, information on the fluctuation display time and information on whether or not a reach has occurred is identified. Also, as already explained, when a fluctuation start command is sent from the main control device 162, a type command is also sent together. In step S2401, the currently received type command is read, and from the command, information on the game result, such as information on the result of a guaranteed jackpot, information on a normal jackpot, information on a special jackpot, and information on a miss result, is identified. Then, in step S2401, the identified information is stored in a register of the MPU 652.

After executing the process of step S2401, a special effect preparation process is executed in step S2402, and an effect setting process is executed in step S2403. The special effect preparation process is described below with reference to Figures 58 and 59. Figure 58 is a flowchart showing the special effect preparation process, Figure 59(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the effect level and the probability of winning a special effect, and Figure 59(b) is a schematic diagram showing the preparation display for special effects.

(Preparation for special effects)
In the special effect preparation process, first in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the first normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the special effect preparation process ends as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2502. In step S2502, it is determined whether or not a special effect flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 674 of the RAM 654. If a positive determination is made in step S2502, the special effect preparation process ends as it is.

If the special effect flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S2502 and the lottery processing of steps S2503 to S2507 is executed.

Specifically, if the current effect level is "1", an affirmative judgment is made in step S2503 and the process proceeds to step S2504, where the lottery process for effect level "1" is executed. For more details, a table for conducting a preparatory lottery for a special effect according to the effect level is stored in the lottery table storage area 661 of the ROM 653 (see FIG. 59(a)). In the lottery process of step S2504, a lottery for the occurrence of a special effect is performed based on the lottery table for effect level "1" and a random number for the lottery. When the effect level is "1", the probability of winning the lottery is 1/2000.

If the current effect level is "2", an affirmative judgment is made in step S2505 and the process proceeds to step S2506, where a lottery process for effect level "2" is executed. In detail, a preparatory lottery for a special effect is executed based on the lottery table for effect level "2" stored in lottery table storage area 661 of ROM 653 and the random numbers for the lottery. When effect level is "2", the probability of winning the preparatory lottery is 1/1500.

If the current effect level is "3", a negative judgment is made in step S2505 and the process proceeds to step S2507 to execute the lottery process for effect level "3". In detail, a preparatory lottery for a special effect is performed based on the lottery table for effect level "3" stored in the lottery table storage area 661 of ROM 653 and the random numbers for the lottery. When the effect level is "3", the probability of winning the preparatory lottery is 1/1000.

In this way, in this embodiment, the probability of special effects occurring differs depending on the effect level, and the lower the effect level with a high expectation of a high setting, the more favorable the occurrence of special effects.

If the lottery process in steps S2504, S2506, and S2507 results in a failure to win the special effect, a negative judgment is made in step S2508, and the special effect preparation process ends. If the lottery process in steps S2504, S2506, and S2507 results in a win to win the special effect, an affirmative judgment is made in step S2508, and the process proceeds to step S2509.

In step S2509, an effect color change process is executed to change the color of the effect image EF of the character CA. In this embodiment, two colors, blue and red, are provided as the colors of the effect image EF. Normally, a blue effect image EF is displayed, and if a special effect is won, the effect image EF is changed to a red effect image EF. In this color change process, a sound effect corresponding to the color change is output from the speaker unit 29, and a color change command is output to the display control device 710. Based on receiving the color change command, the display control device 710 changes the color of the effect image EF of the character CA from blue to red (see Figure 59 (a) -> Figure 59 (b)). The details will be described later, but the effect image EF will return from red to blue when the special effect ends.

After executing the change process of step S2509, the process of starting the "WARNING" display is executed in step S2510. Specifically, background music corresponding to the "WARNING" display is output from the speaker unit 29, and a command to start the "WARNING" display is output to the display control device 710. Upon receiving this start command, the MPU 712 of the display control device 710 displays the word "WARNING" on the display screen 75a (see Figure 59 (a) -> Figure 59 (b)). This notifies the player that a state has been reached in which a special effect may occur (a state in which the internal conditions are met).

After executing the start process of step S2510, in step S2511, a special effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 674 of the RAM 654, and the special effect preparation process is terminated. This special effect flag is a flag that indicates to the MPU 652 that a special effect is in preparation, and is erased when the special effect has ended.

Next, the effect setting process of step S2403 will be described with reference to Figures 60 and 61. Figure 60 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process, and Figure 61 is a schematic diagram showing a table for setting special effects.

(Performance setting process)
As shown in Fig. 60, in the effect setting process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the game round to be started corresponds to a jackpot result. If it corresponds to a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2601 and the process proceeds to step S2602. In step S2602, it is determined whether or not a special effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 674 of the RAM 654. If a negative determination is made in step S2602, the process proceeds to step S2603 and the setting process for the jackpot is executed.

In the setting process for a jackpot, the stopping result of the jackpot symbols is determined (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, if the result is a special jackpot, the stopping result for this game round is determined to be a stopping result in which the same combination of specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) (for example, "7", "7", "7" or "1", "1", "1") is formed on one active line L1 to L5, and if the result is a normal jackpot, the stopping result for this game round is determined to be a stopping result in which the same combination of non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) (for example, "4", "4", "4" or "2", "2", "2") is formed on one active line L1 to L5.

The type of main pattern and the effective lines L1-L5 that are stopped and displayed when a jackpot result occurs are determined randomly by lottery or the like. The final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 store each of the effective lines L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 654. At this time, a process is also executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area. Note that in the following explanation, the address information of the stop result determined in the various stop result determination processes is also stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 654.

In addition, in the setting process for the big win, a variable display mode determination process (presentation pattern determination process) is performed to determine the variable display mode of the big win pattern. In the case of a big win result, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variable display mode determination process for the reach display, a variable display pattern table for the reach display stored in various table areas of the ROM 653 is obtained, and a presentation pattern of the reach display corresponding to the variable display time of the currently received variable start command and the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654. Note that in the variable display mode determination process described below, a corresponding variable display pattern table is obtained from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 653 to determine the presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result. Then, the address information of the presentation pattern determined in the presentation pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654.

Returning to the explanation of step S2602, if a positive determination is made in step S2602, i.e., if a special effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 657 of RAM 654, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, the setting process for the first special effect is executed.

In the setting process for the first special effect, the details of the first special effect are determined by referencing the first special effect setting table stored in ROM 653. The first special effect is a so-called battle effect in which the character CA displayed in the character display area CE is enlarged and displayed in the center of the variable display area ME, and the opponent is determined by lottery from among "shark," "turtle," and "dugong." In the first special effect, the transition is made via the battle part to the result part, in which it is clearly indicated that the girl character has won.

In this first special effect, the opponent is determined based on the effect level and the setting value (setting 1 to setting 3). Below, we will provide additional explanation on the determination pattern of the first special effect with reference to the first special effect setting table shown in Figures 61 (a1) to 61 (a3).

When the effect level is "1", the first special effect setting table corresponding to effect level "1" is referenced. In the first special effect setting table corresponding to effect level "1", when setting 1, there is a 100% chance that a "shark" will be selected as the opponent. When setting 2, there is a 5% chance that a "shark" will be selected as the opponent, a 90% chance that a "turtle" will be selected, and a 5% chance that a "dugong" will be selected. When setting 3, there is a 10% chance that a "turtle" will be selected as the opponent, and a 90% chance that a "dugong" will be selected.

In other words, if you beat the "Shark" at effect level "1", setting 1 is likely and setting 3 is denied; if you beat the "Turtle", setting 2 is likely and setting 1 is denied; and if you beat the "Dugong", setting 3 is likely and setting 1 is denied.

When the effect level is "2", the first special effect setting table corresponding to effect level "2" is referenced. In the first special effect setting table corresponding to effect level "2", in the case of setting 1, the probability that a "shark" will be selected as the opponent is 80%, and the probability that a "turtle" will be selected is 20%. In the case of setting 2, the probability that a "shark" will be selected as the opponent is 10%, the probability that a "turtle" will be selected is 80%, and the probability that a "dugong" will be selected is 10%. In the case of setting 3, the probability that a "turtle" will be selected as the opponent is 20%, and the probability that a "dugong" will be selected is 80%.

In other words, if you beat the "Shark" at effect level "2", setting 1 is likely and setting 3 is denied, if you beat the "Turtle" setting 2 is likely, and if you beat the "Dugong" setting 3 is likely and setting 1 is denied. In this way, the likelihood of setting suggestions is slightly lower at effect level "2" compared to effect level "1".

When the effect level is "3", the first special effect setting table corresponding to effect level "3" is referenced. In the first special effect setting table corresponding to effect level "3", in the case of setting 1, the probability that "shark" will be selected as the opponent is 70%, the probability that "turtle" will be selected is 20%, and the probability that "dugong" will be selected is 10%. In the case of setting 2, the probability that "shark" will be selected as the opponent is 15%, the probability that "turtle" will be selected is 70%, and the probability that "dugong" will be selected is 15%. In the case of setting 3, the probability that "shark" will be selected as the opponent is 10%, the probability that "turtle" will be selected is 20%, and the probability that "dugong" will be selected is 70%.

In other words, if you beat the "Shark" at effect level "3", it is likely that the setting is 1, if you beat the "Turtle", it is likely that the setting is 2, and if you beat the "Dugong", it is likely that the setting is 3. In this way, the accuracy of the setting suggestion is slightly lower at effect level "3" compared to effect level "2".

As described above in detail, in this embodiment, the likelihood of a setting value being suggested by a special effect increases in the effect level order of "1" < "2" < "3", while the likelihood of this increasing increases in the effect level order of "3" < "2" < "1".

Here, we will provide a supplementary explanation of why the likelihood of the setting suggestion by the first special effect is basically higher than the likelihood of the setting suggestion by the effect display of the character CA. As described above, the effect level of the character CA is updated when a miss occurs in the second normal game state and the third normal game state. However, the probability of a miss in the second normal game state and the third normal game state is approximately 1/278 to 1/1820, and the denominator is quite large. Therefore, in order to increase the possibility that the effect level of the character CA matches the actual setting value ("1" to "3"), it is necessary to earn a certain number of times of play in the second normal game state and the third normal game state by staying in those states for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10 shown in this embodiment, the game is mainly performed in the first normal game state, and there is a certain limit to the number of times of play executed in the second normal game state or the third normal game state in a day. In other words, it is practically difficult to reduce the variation in the number of losing results to a negligible level over a day's play, making the effect level unreliable when used as a guide to estimating the setting value.

In contrast, for the setting suggestion by the first special effect, it is necessary to win the preparatory lottery with a probability of 1/1000 to 1/2000 and then win the jackpot with a probability of 1/187 to 1/262, so the hurdle is higher than getting a losing result in the second normal game state and the third normal game state. However, in the first special effect, the appearance rate of "shark" in setting 1, the appearance rate of "turtle" in setting 2, and the appearance rate of "dugong" in setting 3 are far higher than the others. In this way, the influence of the variation in the distribution of "shark," "turtle," and "dugong" for each setting value is reduced, making the suggestion of the setting value by the first special effect more reliable.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 60, after executing the setting process of step S2604, the process proceeds to step S2605, where the special effect flags stored in the various flag storage area 657 of RAM 654 are erased, and this effect setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2601, if a negative judgment is made in step S2601, i.e., if it is judged that the current game round does not correspond to a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2606. In step S2606, it is judged whether or not the current game round corresponds to a miss super reach. If a positive judgment is made in step S2606, the process proceeds to step S2607. In step S2607, it is judged whether or not a special effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 657 of RAM 654. If a negative judgment is made in step S2607, the process proceeds to step S2608, where the setting process for the miss super reach is executed.

The setting process for the Miss Super Reach determines the stopping result of the symbols for the Miss Reach (the stopping result determination process is performed). In the stopping result determination process, the stopping result in which the same combination of specific symbols and combination of non-specific symbols are not formed on the activated lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stopping result for this game round. Specifically, the symbol combination that results in a Miss Reach is determined as the stopping result for this game round.

In addition, in the presentation setting process for the Miss Super Reach, a variable display mode determination process (presentation pattern determination process) is performed to determine the variable display mode of the pattern for the Miss Super Reach. In the variable display mode determination process for the Miss Super Reach, variable display pattern tables for the Miss Super Reach stored in various table areas of ROM 653 are obtained, and a Super Reach presentation pattern (Super Reach A to C, etc.) corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variation start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 654.

Returning to the explanation of step S2607, if a positive judgment is made in step S2607, i.e., if a special effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 657 of RAM 654, the process proceeds to step S2609, where the setting process for the second special effect is executed.

In the setting process for the second special effect, the details of the second special effect are determined by referencing the second special effect setting table stored in ROM 653. Like the first special effect, the second special effect is a so-called battle effect in which the character CA displayed in the character display area CE is enlarged and displayed in the center of the variable display area ME, and the opponent is determined by lottery from among "shark," "turtle," and "dugong." In the second special effect, the transition is made via the battle part to the result part, in which it is clearly stated that the girl character has been defeated.

In the second special effect, the opponent is determined based on the effect level and the setting value (setting 1 to setting 3). Below, we will provide additional explanation on the determination pattern of the second special effect with reference to the second special effect setting table shown in Figure 61 (b).

For the second special effects, the same second special effect setting table is referenced regardless of whether the effect level is "1" to "3." In the second special effect setting table, regardless of whether the effect level is set to 1 to 3, there is a 40% chance that a "shark" will be selected as the opponent, a 30% chance that a "turtle" will be selected, and a 30% chance that a "dugong" will be selected.

In other words, the second special effect that is executed when a losing result occurs is configured so that there is no difference in the opponents that appear in the battle depending on the effect level or setting value. In other words, the second special effect is configured so that it is more difficult to guess the setting value than the first special effect.

After executing the second special effect setting process in step S2609, in step S2610, the special effect flag stored in the various flag storage area 657 of RAM 654 is erased, and this effect setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S2606, if a negative judgment is made in step S2606, i.e., if the current game round does not correspond to a missing super reach, the process proceeds to step S2611. In step S2611, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a missing normal reach. If a positive judgment is made in step S2611, the process executes the setting process for a missing normal reach in step S2612, and then ends this performance setting process.

In the process of setting a normal reach that results in a miss, the stopping result of the symbols for the reach that results in a miss is determined (stop result determination process is performed). In the process of determining the stop result, a stopping result in which the same combination of specific symbols and combination of non-specific symbols are not formed on the activated lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stopping result for this game round. Specifically, a symbol combination that results in a reach miss is determined as the stopping result for this game round.

In addition, in the presentation setting process for a normal miss, a variable display mode determination process (presentation pattern determination process) is performed to determine the variable display mode of the pattern for a normal miss. In the variable display mode determination process for a normal miss, variable display pattern tables for normal miss stored in various table areas of ROM 653 are obtained, and a normal reach presentation pattern (normal reach A to B, etc.) corresponding to the game result in the variable display time and type command of the currently received variation start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 654.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2611, the setting process for a complete miss is executed in step S2613, and then this performance setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for a complete miss, the stopping result of the symbols for a complete miss is determined (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, a stopping result in which the same combination of specific symbols and combination of non-specific symbols are not formed on the pay lines L1 to L5 is determined as the stopping result for this game round. Specifically, a symbol combination that does not form a reach line is determined as the stopping result for this game round.

In addition, in the effect setting process for complete misses, a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) is performed to determine the variable display mode of the pattern for complete misses. In the variable display mode determination process for complete misses, the variable display pattern tables for complete misses stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 are obtained, and a complete miss effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time of the currently received variable start command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 654.

Next, the flow of the first special effect will be explained with reference to the schematic diagrams of Figures 62 and 63. Note that in Figures 62 and 63, when the effect image EF of the character CA is blue, it is distinguished as "no dot hatching", and when the effect image EF is red, it is distinguished as "dot hatching".

As shown in FIG. 62(a), if the player does not win the preparation lottery for the special effect in the first normal game state, the effect image EF of the character CA displayed in the character display area turns blue, indicating that preparation for the special effect is incomplete.

If the player wins the preparation lottery for the special effect, which is held each time a round is played, and the special effect flag is set, the effect image EF of the character CA changes from blue to red, and the word "WARNING" is displayed at the top of the display screen 75a (variable display area ME), as shown in Figure 62 (b). This notifies the player that preparation for the special effect is complete. Since this round of play did not result in a jackpot or a miss corresponding to a super reach, the symbol combination corresponding to the miss result is displayed as shown in Figure 62 (c), and the round of play ends. Even after the round of play ends, the color of the effect image EF remains red, and the word "WARNING" continues to be displayed.

After that, when the game corresponding to the big win result starts and the game progresses to a super reach after transitioning to a reach display, the pattern is displayed in a reduced size in the corner (bottom right) of the display screen 75a, as shown in Figure 62 (d) → Figure 63 (e), and an image identical to the girl character CA displayed in the character display area CE (an image configured so that it is at least recognized as the same by the player) is displayed in the center of the variable display area ME. At the same time, an opponent (a "turtle" character) is displayed in the center of the variable display area ME, and it is clearly indicated that a special effect (battle effect) will occur.

The character displayed in the center of the variable display area ME is basically the same as the character CA displayed in the character display area CE, but is displayed without any effects to avoid confusion with the special pattern shown in the first embodiment.

After that, as shown in Fig. 63(f)→63(g), it is clearly indicated that the girl character has won the battle. In the example shown in Fig. 62 and Fig. 63, the level of the effect image EF of character CA displayed in the character display area is effect level "2". The victory over the opponent "Turtle" suggests that setting 2 is likely.

After the special effect is completed, as shown in Figure 63 (h), the symbol combination that was displayed in a reduced size in the corner of the display screen 75a returns to the variable display area ME as the display of the character images and other items used for the special effect ends, and the player is informed clearly that a jackpot has been achieved in that play round.

When a player is choosing a machine at an amusement hall, the effect level of the character CA that is always resident in the character display area CE can be used as a guide. The suggestion of the setting value based on this effect level has a relatively low degree of certainty, and a more reliable suggestion can be expected from the special effect (first special effect) that occurs only during play. This configuration can increase player satisfaction and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

By configuring the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 to display images suggesting setting values, it is possible to reduce the amount of eye movement required when checking the suggestive images during play, etc. However, considering that the display screen 75a is for displaying patterns, it is undesirable for the suggestive images to occupy the variable pattern display area ME. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, for special effects with a relatively short execution period, the variable display area ME is used to prevent them from being overlooked, and for characters CA, which are assumed to be constantly displayed, there is no need to consider the possibility of them being overlooked, so a display area is reserved in the corner of the display screen 75a. This allows for ideal coexistence with the variable display area ME.

The special effects suggestion type is determined by referring to the effect level, and by linking the special effects with the effect level, it is possible to provide innovative suggestions that have never been seen before. In particular, by changing the likelihood of the special effects suggestion depending on the effect level, it is possible to effectively prevent the suggestion function from becoming obsolete.

When selecting a gaming machine by referring to the suggestions from the effect level, there is a concern that the operating rate of that gaming machine will decrease if the display mode (effect level "3") is not what one would expect for a high setting (e.g. setting 3). This can be detrimental to the gaming hall. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by configuring the effect level to be "3" so that the hurdle for the first special effect to occur is lower than when the effect level is "1" or "2," players who are hoping for suggestions from the more likely first special effect can be encouraged to play the gaming machine, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, a special effect flag is set based on winning the lottery for generating a special effect, and a first special effect is executed (a set value is suggested) based on a jackpot result in that state (hereinafter referred to as the suggestion waiting state). When the state transitions to the suggestion waiting state, the player is notified that the state is a suggestion waiting state, which can appropriately build up anticipation that the suggestion will be executed. In addition, by being notified that the preparation for the suggestion of the set value is complete, attention to the game is increased, and the player is encouraged to play (continue playing) on the gaming machine.

If a miss occurs in the Super Reach after the transition to the suggested waiting state, the suggested waiting state is released. This configuration allows the player to aim for a jackpot result before a miss occurs in the Super Reach, which adds tension to the game after the transition to the suggested waiting state.

In this embodiment, the probability of a miss resulting in a super reach in the first normal game state is set to be higher than the probability of a jackpot result. With this configuration, even if the hurdle for transitioning to the suggestion waiting state is lowered, it is possible to prevent excessive occurrence of setting suggestions. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunities to increase attention to the game by transitioning to the suggestion waiting state, making this a practically preferable configuration.

If, despite transitioning to a suggested waiting state, the suggested waiting state continues for an excessively long time without resulting in a jackpot, this can be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, in the embodiment, the probability of a jackpot in the first normal game state is higher than the probability of winning in the lottery for the occurrence of a special effect, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed by raising the hurdle for the establishment of the conditions for transitioning to the suggested waiting state while lowering the hurdle for the establishment of the conditions for executing the first special effect.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, the special effect is executed when the special effect flag is set and a big win result or a miss result corresponding to the super reach occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to configure the special effect to be executed only when the special effect flag is set and not to execute the special effect when a miss result corresponding to the super reach occurs.

In addition, in the second embodiment described above, the second special effect is executed when a miss corresponding to a super reach occurs when the special effect flag is set, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the second special effect may be executed even when a miss corresponding to a normal reach occurs when the special effect flag is set, and the conditions for the second special effect to occur may be relaxed.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment described above, even if a character image similar to the character CA in the character display area CE is displayed in the center of the variable display area ME after a special effect has begun, the character CA continues to be displayed in the character display area CE. However, when a character image is displayed in the center of the variable display area ME due to a special effect, it is also possible to temporarily hide the character CA in the character display area CE (for example, until the special effect is completed).

In addition, the character image displayed in the center of the variable display area ME when a special performance begins may also be configured to have the same effect as the character CA.

<Modification 3>
In the second embodiment, the preparatory drawing for the special effect is performed for the game times related to both the losing result and the big win result in the first normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to perform the preparatory drawing for the special effect for the game times related to the losing result in the first normal game state, while not performing the preparatory drawing for the special effect for the game times related to the big win result.

<Modification 4>
In the second embodiment, the special effect flag is erased when the second special effect is executed in a game round corresponding to a losing super reach, but it is also possible to configure the special effect flag not to be erased (retained) when the second special effect is executed in a game round corresponding to a losing super reach. In other words, it is also possible to limit the opportunity for erasing the special effect flag to a big win (execution of the first special effect).

<Modification 5>
In the second embodiment, the first special effect and the second special effect are executed instead of the super reach executed in the variable display area ME, but this is not limited to this. For example, the first special effect and the second special effect may be displayed in a separate window on the display screen 75a, and the super reach and the first special display and the second special display may be executed simultaneously in the variable display area ME. In addition, the first special effect and the second special effect can be executed in an area other than the variable display area ME (for example, the character display area CE).

In addition, while the special effect flag is set and a jackpot result or a miss corresponding to a super reach occurs, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure the special effect to be executed when the player operates an operation button or the like provided on the front door frame 14 when the special effect flag is set. In this case, it is preferable to configure the special effect to be executed separately from the variable display for each play round using the separate window or the like.

<Modification 6>
In the second embodiment, the player is notified (disclosed) that he/she has won the preliminary lottery for the special effect by the color of the effect image EF of the character CA and the word "WARNING", but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the player is not notified (non-disclosed) that he/she has won the preliminary lottery for the special effect.

<Modification 7>
In the above second embodiment, a difference was set so that the probability of winning the preparatory lottery for the first special effect increases in the order of effect level "1"< effect level "2"< effect level "3." However, this can be changed to set a difference so that the probability of winning the preparatory lottery for the first special effect increases in the order of effect level "3"< effect level "2"< effect level "1."

In addition, in the second embodiment described above, the probability of winning the preparatory lottery for the first special effect differs depending on the effect level, but it is also possible to unify the probability of winning the preparatory lottery for the first special effect for effect levels "1" to "3."

<Modification 8>
In the second embodiment, the effect image EF of the character CA displayed in the character display area CE is always displayed in the first normal game state, but the display period of the effect image EF may be limited. For example, it is also possible to display the effect image EF only from when the special effect flag is set until the special effect is completed. It is also possible to determine whether or not to display the effect image EF (ON/OFF) by lottery or the like. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the special effect flag is set, the color of the effect is changed and the word "WARNING" is displayed to notify the fact that the special effect flag is set. However, it is also possible to basically hide the effect image EF in the first normal game state, and when the special effect flag is set, the effect image EF is displayed to notify the fact that the special effect flag is set.

<Modification 9>
In the second embodiment, the size (effect level) of the effect image EF of the character CA displayed in the character display area CE is changed in response to the occurrence of an event for which a setting difference is set in Settings 1 to 3 (a miss result in the second normal game state or the third normal game state), and the changed effect level is carried over to the first normal game state in which a special presentation occurs. This configuration is not essential, and it is also possible to omit the function of suggesting the setting value based on the size (effect level) of the effect image EF of the character CA. For example, the effect level of the effect image EF of the character CA may be unified in the first normal game state.

<Modification 10>
In the above second embodiment, the color of the effect image EF of the character CA displayed in the character display area CE is changed to red and the word "WARNING" is displayed in the variable display area ME to notify that a special effect (setting suggestion) may occur. However, in view of the fact that the jackpot result is the trigger for the execution of a special effect (setting suggestion), it is also possible to configure it to display words such as "Chance for setting suggestion with jackpot" or "Aim for the jackpot".

In addition, the specific configuration for notifying the player that a special effect (setting suggestion) may occur is not limited to the display screen 75a. It is also possible to configure the speaker unit 29 to output a message indicating the situation.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-mentioned embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by a combination of the embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode, the number of balls held decreases (slightly) as the game progresses. This can be changed to a configuration in which the number of balls held increases as the game progresses, even in the second normal game state. However, in order to provide a difference in the degree of advantage between the second normal game state and the third normal game state such that the latter is more advantageous, it is preferable to configure the increase rate of the number of balls held in the second normal game state to be slower than the increase rate of the number of balls held in the third normal game state, for example.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, if the time-saving feature ends without a jackpot despite a transition to the high probability mode, the game transitions to a third normal game state, which is more advantageous to the player, including as a means of relief. In view of this relief function, it is sufficient that the third normal game state is at least more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and it is also possible to configure the game so that the rate at which the number of balls decreases is slower than in the second normal game state. Note that, when a configuration in which the number of balls increases in the second normal game state is also used as shown in the above-mentioned modified example (1), the rate at which the number of balls increases in the third normal game state may be configured to be slower than in the second normal game state.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, for example, when a 16R special jackpot result B is obtained, the game transitions to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode without passing through the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to configure the game so that the game must pass through the second normal game state to transition to the third normal game state regardless of the jackpot result.

(4) In the above embodiments, the number of time-saving times that function as a hurdle for transitioning to the third normal game state, i.e., the number of times the support mode is maintained in the high-frequency support mode, is varied depending on the type of jackpot result. However, it is also possible to make the number of time-saving times constant regardless of the type of jackpot result. For example, it is advisable to unify the number of times the high-frequency support mode is maintained in the case of a 2R special jackpot result, a 6R special jackpot result, or a 16R special jackpot result to N times. Note that when making such a change, it is preferable to unify the number of times the high-frequency support mode is maintained in the case of transitioning to the fourth normal game state via a 2R normal jackpot result or an 8R normal jackpot result.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration is provided in which if a jackpot result is obtained during a normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode, a transition to a normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode can occur. In other words, a configuration is provided in which the third normal game state can end with the result of a jackpot result. In addition to or instead of this, a configuration may be provided in which a transition to the low probability mode occurs when the number of games played after the transition to the high probability mode reaches a predetermined number (e.g., M times). In this case, by making the number of games played during which the high probability mode is maintained greater than the number of games played (time-saving times) during which the high-frequency support mode is maintained, a configuration can be realized in which a transition is made to the third normal game state with a limited number of games via the second normal game state.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the range of the number of time-saving times set when a special jackpot result is obtained based on winning the lower actuation port 62a and the range of the number of time-saving times set when a special jackpot result is obtained based on winning the right actuation port 63a are both configured to be "0" to "100", and the distribution of the number of time-saving times is differentiated so that the latter is biased toward a smaller number than the former, thereby ensuring the superiority of the right actuation port 63a over the lower actuation port 62a. In order to increase the expectation that the hurdle for transitioning to the third normal game state will be lower than before the special jackpot result was obtained and the game state transitions to the second special game state again, that is, the expectation that the number of games required to transition to the third normal game state will be reduced, the maximum number of time-saving times set when a special jackpot result is obtained based on winning the right actuation port 63a may be configured to be smaller than the maximum number of time-saving times set when a special jackpot result is obtained based on winning the lower actuation port 62a. In addition, if a winning combination occurs based on a winning entry into the right operating port 63a, the number of time-saving rounds may be set to "0", i.e., a transition to the third normal game state may be confirmed.

In the above embodiment, the number of time-saving times is not shortened in some cases where a special jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state, but it is also possible to shorten the number of time-saving times in all cases where a special jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state. For example, the first number of time-saving times (e.g., 50 times) set in the case where a special jackpot result is obtained based on a ball entering the lower operating port 62a may be specified to be greater than the second number of time-saving times (e.g., 30 times) set in the case where a special jackpot result is obtained based on a ball entering the right operating port 63a. In addition, in order to make it appear as if the number of time-saving times remaining at the time when a special jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state has been shortened when returning to the second normal game state, it is also possible to set all of the number of time-saving times set in the case where a special jackpot result is obtained based on a ball entering the right operating port 63a to "0".

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the time period during which the image changes in the right operating port display section DR is shorter in the third normal game state than in the second normal game state, thereby smoothing the progress of the game in the third normal game state, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the time period during which the image changes in the right operating port display section DR is longer in the third normal game state than in the second normal game state, or to configure the time period during which the image changes in the right operating port display section DR is the same in the second and third normal game states.

(8) The number of time-saving times set when a 2R normal jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state and the number of time-saving times set when a 2R special jackpot result is obtained are both "50". In this case, in both cases of returning to the second normal game state through the special game state and transitioning (demotion) to the fourth normal game state, the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 and the speaker unit 29 may be configured to have the same effects that indicate the game state, so that it is difficult or impossible for the player to distinguish whether the game state is the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state. By making the game state invisible in this way, when the number of time-saving times becomes "0", a branch occurs in which the game state is transitioned (promoted) to the third normal game state, which is more advantageous than the second normal game state, or transitioned (demotion) to the first normal game state, which is less advantageous than the second normal game state. This makes it possible to preferably increase the sense of tension when the number of time-saving times set at the time of transitioning to the game state is consumed.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the results of the lottery based on winning the through gate 66 are displayed on the through gate display section DS of the main display unit 81, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to display the results of the lottery based on winning the through gate 66 on a separate display section such as the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the upper variable winning device 64 and the through gate 66 are arranged upstream of the right-side operating ball entry section 63 on the right route, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to arrange the upper variable winning device 64 and the through gate 66 downstream of the right-side operating ball entry section 63 on the right route.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the confirmed display time of the image in the lower operating port display section DL is configured to be shorter than the confirmed display time of the image in the right operating port display section DR, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the confirmed display time of the image in the right operating port display section DR may be configured to be shorter than the confirmed display time of the image in the lower operating port display section DL, or the confirmed display time of the image in the right operating port display section DR and the lower operating port display section DL may be configured to be the same.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the fixed display time of the image in the lower actuation port display section DL and the right actuation port display section DR is not changed regardless of the normal game state, but the fixed display time of the lower actuation port display section DL and the right actuation port display section DR may be changed depending on the type of normal game state. For example, the fixed display time may be shortened in the order of the first normal game state → the second normal game state → the third normal game state.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the lower variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened in the second special game state, and the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is arranged on the flow path (right route) leading to the lower variable winning device 65, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to arrange a configuration equivalent to the lower variable winning device 65 on the flow path leading to the right-side operating ball entry section 63.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the protrusions 335a, 336a are provided as a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball rolling on the shutter 331 of the right-side actuation ball entrance section 63, but the specific configuration for gaining the required time for the game ball to pass over the shutter 331 is arbitrary. For example, the upper limit of the shutter 331 may be provided with irregularities to cause the flow path to meander up and down.

In addition, the protrusions 335a and 336a are biased toward the downstream portion (the intermediate passage portion 323 side) of the upstream passage portion 322, but it is also possible to position the protrusions 335a and 336a in the upstream portion or midstream portion of the upstream passage portion 322.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the right-side operating ball entry section 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 are arranged vertically offset, and the ball passage in the ball entry unit 70 is cranked up and down, but it is also possible to arrange the right-side operating ball entry section 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 in a line.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the intermediate passage section 323 serving as the "communicating passage section" is branched at an intermediate position so that some of the game balls passing through the intermediate passage section 323 are discharged from the game area PE without being guided to the lower variable winning device 65. However, it is not necessarily necessary to form the above-mentioned branch in the intermediate passage section 323.

In addition, game balls that flow out from an intermediate position of the ball passage through the intermediate passage portion 323 are discharged from the game area PE without passing through the outlet 68, but the game balls may be guided to the outlet 68.

(16) In the above embodiments, the right-side actuation entrance section 63 is configured to switch between the open and closed states by sliding the shutter 331 in the forward and backward directions, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the shutter may be configured to switch between the open and closed states by sliding left and right or up and down. Note that the shutter 331 does not necessarily have to be a sliding type, and it can also be a rotating type.

Similarly, the shutter 345 of the lower variable winning device 65 is configured to switch between open and closed states by sliding in the forward and backward directions, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the shutter may be configured to switch between open and closed states by sliding left and right or up and down. Note that the shutter 345 does not necessarily have to be of the sliding type, and it may also be of the rotating type.

In addition, the upper variable winning device 64 shown in the above embodiment is configured so that the shutter 315 rotates parallel to the front surface of the game board 60 to switch between the open and closed states, but this is not limited to this. For example, the shutter may be configured so that the shutter rotates in a direction intersecting the front surface of the game board to switch between the open and closed states. Note that the shutter 315 does not necessarily have to be of the rotating type, and it can also be of the sliding type.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the time required for a game ball to pass over the shutter 331 of the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is longer than the interval time during which the shutter 331 is maintained in a closed state in the high-frequency support mode and shorter than the interval time during which the shutter 331 is maintained in a closed state in the low-frequency support mode, but the predetermined time may be changed as desired.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, a transition to the high probability mode is confirmed by a ball entering the favorable ball entry section 314 provided in the upper variable winning device 64. However, it is also possible to omit the favorable ball entry section 314 and have a configuration in which a transition to the high probability mode is confirmed when a guaranteed jackpot result is achieved.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, a lottery based on a ball entering the lower operating port 62a does not result in a special winning result. However, this may be modified so that a lottery based on a ball entering the lower operating port 62a also results in a special winning result.

(20) In each of the above embodiments, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is configured to display the remaining number of time-saving plays, i.e., the remaining number of plays until the transition to the third normal game state. The remaining number displayed on the display screen 75a does not necessarily have to match the remaining number of time-saving plays, and may indicate the remaining number of time-saving plays.

In this case, for example, by making it difficult to distinguish from the display whether the number of time-saving times is set to "100 times," "70 times," "50 times," "30 times," or "10 times," interest in the game can be increased. When such a display is made, for example, when the number of times that play has been performed reaches "10 times," "30 times," "50 times," or "70 times," a display effect is executed to indicate that there is a possibility of transitioning to the third normal game state, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous during the second normal game state.

In addition, in the second normal game state where the number of time-saving times is "50 times," if "100 times" is displayed as the display corresponding to the number of time-saving times, the actual number of time-saving times may be any of "10 times," "30 times," "50 times," "70 times," and "100 times." In this case, the corresponding display may be configured to increase the number that is subtracted multiple times during one game after the number of times that have been played reaches a specific number, and when the time-saving times have been used up, the display may show "0 times."

(21) In each of the above embodiments, a difference is set in the variable display time when the reserved number is "3" or more between the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to make the variable display time the same even when the reserved number is "3" or more.

(22) If a jackpot occurs in the second normal game state and the number of times the time-saving feature is newly set is less than the number of times the time-saving feature is remaining, the player may be notified of this and be informed that the third normal game state is approaching.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the first to third normal game states are differentiated by the combination of the support mode and the lottery mode, but this is not limited to this. As long as a difference that is advantageous to the player is secured for each normal game state in the order of the first normal game state < the second normal game state < the third normal game state, the specific configuration is arbitrary. For example, a medium probability mode that has a higher probability of winning than the low probability mode and a lower probability of winning than the high probability mode may be provided as the lottery mode, and the first normal game state may correspond to the low probability mode, the second normal game state to the medium probability mode, and the third normal game state to the high probability mode, respectively, to differentiate them. Even in this case, if the game has been played a reference number of times without a jackpot result despite having been switched to the medium probability mode, the game can be configured to switch to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode, thereby suitably suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play. In this configuration, it is up to the discretion of the player to decide whether each normal game state corresponds to the high-frequency support mode or the low-frequency support mode, so long as the advantageous and disadvantageous relationships described above can be ensured.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, the display of changing patterns on the actuation port display units DL, DR and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 75 are started based on the winning/losing lottery (determination process) being performed in the main control unit 162, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to start the display of changing patterns on the actuation port display units DL, DR and the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 75 prior to the winning/losing lottery (determination process) being performed in the main control unit 162.

(25) It is also possible to provide a monitoring device for monitoring the ball entry status into the ball entry section such as the operating port 62a in the pachinko machine 10 shown in each of the above embodiments, and to change the probability of winning the preliminary lottery for the special effect based on the monitoring information (ball entry rate) from the monitoring device. For example, it is preferable to increase the probability of winning the preliminary lottery by increasing the deviation of the ball entry rate from a reference value.

(26) When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is also possible to configure the initial effect level of the character CA to be determined based on the selected setting value (setting 1 to setting 3) and the initial effect level determination table. For example, the initial effect level determination table corresponding to setting 1 may be configured to have a probability of 30% for effect level 1, a probability of 30% for effect level 2, and a probability of 40% for effect level 3, the initial effect level determination table corresponding to setting 2 may be configured to have a probability of 30% for effect level 1, a probability of 40% for effect level 2, and a probability of 30% for effect level 3, and the initial effect level determination table corresponding to setting 3 may be configured to have a probability of 40% for effect level 1, a probability of 30% for effect level 2, and a probability of 30% for effect level 3.

(27) In each of the above embodiments, when a normal jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state or the third normal game state, the game state transitions through the first special game state to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. However, instead of or in addition to this, it is also possible to configure the game state to transition through the first special game state to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode when a normal jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state or the third normal game state.

(28) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which is equipped with a take-in device and starts the reels spinning by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in a storage section have been taken in by the take-in device.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from the above-mentioned embodiment, while indicating effects, etc., as necessary. Note that in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned embodiment are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
The following feature A group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature A1. A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) when a predetermined acquisition condition (ball entering the operating port 62a) is met;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g., winning information);
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a display unit (e.g., an operating port display unit DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit;
a game round control means (e.g., a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display means to start variable display of a picture on the picture display means prior to the judgment being made by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment, and ending the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning a game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a result of determination corresponding to predetermined determination information and the game number control means stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of the determination,
As the normal game states, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode), a second normal game state (a second normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than the first normal game state, and a third normal game state (a third normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode) which is even more advantageous to a player than the second normal game state,
A second normal game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transition to the second normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state;
When the second normal gaming state transition means transitions to the second normal gaming state, an upper limit setting means (a function of setting the number of time-saving times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games in the second normal gaming state (the number of time-saving times);
and third normal game state transition means (a function of executing processing for transition to the third normal game state in an MPU 602 of a main control device 162) for transitioning the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the first upper limit when a first upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, and for transitioning the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the second upper limit when a second upper limit higher than the first upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means.

According to feature A1, after transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state via the special game state, the number of plays executed in the second normal game state reaches an upper limit, and the state transitions to a third normal game state that is more advantageous to the player. The upper limits include a first upper limit and a second upper limit, and a difference occurs in the transition hurdle to the third normal game state between when the first upper limit is set and when the second upper limit is set. In other words, there will be a second normal game state that is easy to transition to the third normal game state and a second normal game state that is difficult to transition to the third normal game state. In this way, by diversifying the second normal game state and providing multiple transition hurdles to the third normal game state, monotony in the game in the normal game state can be suppressed, and this can contribute to increasing attention to the game.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a game board on which a game area is formed, special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters a starting ball entry section provided in the game area, acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, judgment means for sequentially judging whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information, a picture display means having a display unit and capable of variably displaying a picture on the display unit, and a game round in which the picture display means starts to display a variable picture before the judgment is made by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, displays a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment, and ends the variable display of the picture, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is stored in the acquired information storage means. A game machine comprising: a game round control means for controlling the picture display means so that a picture for each game round is variably displayed in accordance with information; and a special game state transition means for transitioning the game state to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information and the game round control means stops and displays the picture corresponding to the judgment result; the normal game states include a first normal game state, a second normal game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and a third normal game state that is even more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state; and a means for switching the game state between the first normal game state, the second normal game state, and the third normal game state according to the game situation.

Feature A2. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is entered into a starting ball entry section (e.g., a right operation port 63a) provided in the game area;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g., winning information);
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a display unit (e.g., an operating port display unit DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit;
a game round control means (e.g., a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display means to start variable display of a picture on the picture display means prior to the judgment being made by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment, and ending the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning a game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a result of determination corresponding to predetermined determination information and the game number control means stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of the determination,
As the normal game states, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode), a second normal game state (a second normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than the first normal game state, and a third normal game state (a third normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode) which is even more advantageous to a player than the second normal game state,
A second normal game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transition to the second normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state;
When the second normal gaming state transition means transitions to the second normal gaming state, an upper limit setting means (a function of setting the number of time-saving times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games in the second normal gaming state (the number of time-saving times);
and third normal game state transition means (a function of executing processing for transition to the third normal game state in an MPU 602 of a main control device 162) for transitioning the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the first upper limit when a first upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, and for transitioning the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the second upper limit when a second upper limit higher than the first upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means.

According to feature A2, after the first normal game state transitions to the second normal game state via the special game state, the number of plays performed in the second normal game state reaches an upper limit, and the state transitions to a third normal game state that is more advantageous to the player. The upper limits include a first upper limit and a second upper limit, and a difference occurs in the hurdle for transitioning to the third normal game state between when the first upper limit is set and when the second upper limit is set. In other words, there will be a second normal game state that is easy to transition to the third normal game state and a second normal game state that is difficult to transition to the third normal game state. In this way, by diversifying the second normal game state and providing multiple hurdles for transitioning to the third normal game state, monotony in the game in the normal game state can be suppressed, and the interest in the game can be increased.

Feature A3. A variable ball entry section (upper variable winning device 64) that can be switched between an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
An opening/closing control means (a function of executing opening/closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the closed state and the open state when the special game state is in effect,
The gaming machine described in feature A2 is characterized in that the opening and closing control means has a means for setting the opening and closing mode of the variable ball entry section in the special game state to a predetermined mode when transitioning through the special game state to the second normal game state corresponding to the second upper limit, and for setting the opening and closing mode of the variable ball entry section in the special game state to the predetermined mode when transitioning through the special game state to the second normal game state corresponding to the first upper limit.

As shown in feature A1, etc., by providing a difference in the hurdle for transitioning to the third normal game state, monotony in the game can be effectively prevented. However, if the hurdle could be identified from the opening and closing state (behavior) of the variable ball entry part in the special game state before transitioning to the second normal game state, there is a concern that attention to the game in the second normal game state will decrease. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by making the opening and closing state of the variable ball entry part the same regardless of whether the first upper limit or the second upper limit is set, it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of inconveniences such as the upper limit being identified in advance from the opening and closing state of the variable ball entry part.

Feature A4. The gaming machine described in Feature A2 or Feature A3, wherein the second normal gaming state is a gaming state (normal gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode) in which the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is more likely to occur when the judgment is made by the judgment means than the first normal gaming state.

In order to enhance the variety of play while preventing excessive bias in the degree of advantage, it is preferable to set the upper limit somewhat high and reduce the probability of reaching the upper limit. However, on the other hand, if the upper limit is set too high, the game until the upper limit is reached may drag on or the impression may be strengthened that it is practically impossible to reach, which may result in a deficiency in the effect of increasing interest in the game through diversification of the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the game state (high probability mode) is set in which the result corresponding to the specified judgment information is likely to be obtained, the frequency of reaching the upper limit can be prevented even if the upper limit is set low, and the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above can be preferably prevented.

Feature A5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A2 to A4, characterized in that the second normal gaming state is a gaming state in which it is easier to score a ball into the starting scoring area than in the first normal gaming state.

The transition (promotion) to the third normal game state is accompanied by a certain degree of tension, and if this tension continues for an excessively long period of time, it can cause the player to become fatigued. Therefore, by setting an upper limit on the number of games that can be played based on a ball entering the starting ball entry area in the second normal game state, and by configuring the second normal game state so that it is easy to enter the starting ball entry area, the game can be progressed quickly. This can increase the attention paid to the game while reducing the fatigue caused by it.

Feature A6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A2 to A5, characterized in that the second normal gaming state is a gaming state configured so that the variable display period (variable display time) of the image per game is shorter than that in the first normal gaming state.

The transition (promotion) to the third normal game state is accompanied by a certain degree of tension, and if this tension continues for an excessively long period of time, it can cause the player to become fatigued. Therefore, by setting an upper limit on the number of game plays executed based on the ball entering the starting ball entry area in the second normal game state, and by configuring the variable display period of the images to be shorter in the second normal game state than in the first normal game state, the game can be progressed quickly. This can increase the attention paid to the game while mitigating the fatigue caused by it.

In particular, when combined with feature A5, the variable display period is shortened as the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area increases, allowing smooth progress in the second normal game state, which is played in anticipation of reaching the upper limit. This allows the fatigue relief effect to be exerted even more effectively.

Feature A7. The normal gaming state includes a fourth normal gaming state (a fourth normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than the first normal gaming state and less advantageous to a player than the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state;
A fourth normal game state transition means for transitioning to the fourth normal game state via the special game state (a function of transitioning to the fourth normal game state in response to a normal big win result in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
a first normal gaming state transition means for transitioning to the first normal gaming state when the number of games in the fourth normal gaming state reaches a specified number (for example, 50 games) (a function of transitioning to the first normal gaming state after the high frequency support mode is terminated by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A gaming machine described in any one of Features A2 to A6, characterized in that the upper limit setting means is configured so that at least one of the first upper limit and the second upper limit is less than the specified number of times.

For players who have experienced reaching the set number of times in the fourth normal game state without winning the lottery for transitioning to the special game state, it is possible to give the impression that reaching the upper limit is realistic when the game enters the second normal game state. With this configuration, it is expected that the attention paid to the game when transitioning to the second normal game state will increase.

Feature A8. The normal gaming state includes a fourth normal gaming state (a fourth normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than the first normal gaming state and less advantageous to a player than the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state;
The predetermined judgment information includes first judgment information (information corresponding to a special jackpot result) and second judgment information (information corresponding to a normal jackpot result),
a means for transitioning a gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result by the determination means in the second normal gaming state becomes a determination result corresponding to the first determination information;
The gaming machine described in feature A7 is characterized in that it is provided with a means for transitioning the gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state via the special gaming state when the judgment result by the judgment means in the second normal gaming state becomes a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, if a winning result is obtained during the second normal game state, the game state transitions to the special game state. After the special game state ends, the game state branches into two cases: returning to the second normal game state, and transitioning to the fourth normal game state (being demoted). This makes it possible to effectively prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Feature A9. The gaming machine described in Feature A8, characterized in that the upper limit setting means has a means for resetting the upper limit in the second normal gaming state when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information before reaching the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means and when the special gaming state is passed and the second normal gaming state is entered.

According to feature A9, even if a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information is obtained while playing in the second normal gaming state aiming for the upper limit, there is a possibility of returning to the second normal gaming state again. When returning to the second normal gaming state, a new upper limit is set, and it is possible to re-attempt transition to the third normal gaming state. Therefore, a decrease in motivation to play caused by transition to the special gaming state can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A2 to A9, characterized in that the difference between the first upper limit and the second upper limit is smaller than the first upper limit.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the transition to the third normal game state does not occur when the number of play times corresponding to the first upper limit is reached, the hurdle to reach the number of play times corresponding to the second upper limit from there is lowered, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in anticipation for reaching the second upper limit. This makes it possible to suitably prevent a decrease in motivation to play when the first hurdle is unsuccessful, even when multiple hurdles are used.

Feature A11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A2 to A9, characterized in that it is provided with a means for making a predetermined notification at the number of games corresponding to the first upper limit and the number of games corresponding to the second upper limit when the second upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means.

As shown in feature A2, etc., when multiple hurdles are provided for transitioning to the third normal game state, attention to the game can be increased by suggesting the possibility of transitioning to the third normal game state at the first upper limit, even if the first upper limit has not been reached.

Feature A12. A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that acquires special information (reserved information) when a predetermined acquisition condition (ball entering the operating port 62a) is met;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g., winning information);
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a display unit (e.g., an operating port display unit DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit;
a game round control means (e.g., a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display means to start variable display of a picture on the picture display means prior to the judgment being made by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment, and ending the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning a game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a result of determination corresponding to predetermined determination information and the game number control means stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of the determination,
The normal game states include a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low-frequency support mode and a low-probability mode), a second normal game state (a second normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode and a high-probability mode) which is more advantageous to a player than the first normal game state, and a third normal game state (a third normal game state corresponding to a low-frequency support mode and a high-probability mode) which is even more advantageous to a player than the second normal game state,
A second normal game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transition to the second normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to the second normal game state upon the end of the special game state;
When the second normal gaming state transition means transitions to the second normal gaming state, an upper limit setting means (a function of setting the number of time-saving times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games in the second normal gaming state (the number of time-saving times);
a third normal game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transition to the third normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal game state has reached the upper limit;
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of upper limits are provided, and the upper limit setting means is configured to set any one of the plurality of upper limits as the upper limit of the number of games in the second normal gaming state.

According to feature A12, after transitioning from the first normal game state to the special game state and then to the second normal game state, the number of plays performed in the second normal game state reaches an upper limit, causing a transition to a third normal game state that is more advantageous to the player. Multiple upper limits are set, and the hurdle to transition to the third normal game state differs depending on which of these upper limits is set. In other words, there will be a second normal game state that is easy to transition to the third normal game state, and a second normal game state that is difficult to transition to the third normal game state. In this way, by diversifying the second normal game state and providing multiple hurdles to transition to the third normal game state, monotony in the game in the normal game state can be suppressed, and this can contribute to increasing attention to the game.

The technical ideas shown in Features A3 to A11 can also be applied to Feature A12.

<Characteristics Group B>
The following feature B group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature B1. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is entered into a starting ball entry section (e.g., a right operation port 63a) provided in the game area;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g., winning information);
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a display unit (e.g., an operating port display unit DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit;
a game round control means (e.g., a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display means to start variable display of a picture on the picture display means prior to the judgment being made by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment, and ending the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning a game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a result of determination corresponding to predetermined determination information and the game number control means stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of the determination,
As the normal game states, a first normal game state (a first normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode), a second normal game state (a second normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than the first normal game state, and a third normal game state (a third normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode) which is even more advantageous to a player than the second normal game state,
A transition condition setting means (a function of setting the number of time-saving times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a transition condition to the third normal gaming state when the first normal gaming state is transitioned to the second normal gaming state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the transition condition setting means has a mitigation means for mitigating the transition condition to the third normal game state when, in the second normal game state, the judgment result by the judgment means becomes a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information and the game state transitions to the second normal game state via the special game state (a configuration in which the number of time-saving times set in the event of a jackpot result related to the right actuation port 63a is more favorable than the number of time-saving times set in the event of a jackpot result related to the lower actuation port 62a).

As shown in this feature, by configuring the game so that the degree of advantage increases by transitioning from the first normal game state → the second normal game state → the third normal game state, monotony in the game can be suppressed. Here, the transition conditions for transitioning from the second normal game state to the most advantageous third normal game state may be relaxed when a judgment result (hereinafter referred to as a winning result) corresponding to predetermined judgment information is obtained in the second normal game state and the game returns to the second normal game state via a special game state. In this way, if the hurdle to the third normal game state is lowered when the second normal game state is looped, the effect of suppressing monotony in the game can be preferably exerted by using multiple normal game states in combination.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a game board on which a game area is formed, special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters a starting ball entry section provided in the game area, acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, judgment means for sequentially judging whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information, a picture display means having a display unit and capable of variably displaying a picture on the display unit, and a game round in which the picture display means starts to display a variable picture before the judgment is made by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, displays a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment, and ends the variable display of the picture, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is stored in the acquired information storage means. A game machine comprising: a game round control means for controlling the picture display means so that a picture for each game round is variably displayed in accordance with information; and a special game state transition means for transitioning the game state to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information and the game round control means stops and displays the picture corresponding to the judgment result; the normal game states include a first normal game state, a second normal game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and a third normal game state that is even more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state; and a means for switching the game state between the first normal game state, the second normal game state, and the third normal game state according to the game situation.

Feature B2. The transition condition setting means sets an upper limit on the number of times a game is executed in the second normal gaming state as the transition condition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state;
The gaming machine described in feature B1, wherein the mitigation means is a means for making the upper limit set when transitioning from the second normal game state via the special game state lower than the upper limit set when transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state.

As shown in this characteristic, in a configuration in which a transition to the third normal gaming state occurs when the number of play times executed in the second normal gaming state reaches an upper limit, whether or not this upper limit can be reached is important in progressing the game advantageously. Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, when a winning result occurs in the second normal gaming state and a return is made from the special gaming state to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit may be lowered, and the occurrence of such an event can heighten anticipation for the transition to the third normal gaming state.

Feature B3. The predetermined judgment information includes first judgment information (information corresponding to a special jackpot result) and second judgment information (information corresponding to a normal jackpot result),
a means for transitioning to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result by the determination means during the second normal gaming state corresponds to the first determination information;
A gaming machine as described in Feature B1 or Feature B2, characterized in that it is provided with a means for transitioning to the first normal gaming state via the special gaming state when a judgment result by the judgment means during the second normal gaming state becomes a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

As shown by this feature, in a gaming machine in which a winning result is the trigger for transition (demotion) from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the player plays in the hope that a winning result will not be obtained in the second normal gaming state. Here, if a winning result is obtained, the player may be demoted to the first normal gaming state, but may also return to the second normal gaming state and the conditions for transition to the third normal gaming state may be relaxed. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a rapid decline in the player's motivation to play when a winning result is obtained in the second normal gaming state.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B3, characterized in that the transition condition setting means includes a means for setting a transition condition that is more difficult to achieve than the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means when the determination result by the determination means in the second normal gaming state corresponds to predetermined determination information and the game transitions to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state.

As shown by this feature, when a winning result is obtained in the second normal game state, the hurdle to the third normal game state is not necessarily lowered, but may be raised, which adds a sense of tension to the game.

Feature B5. The gaming machine described in Feature B4 is configured such that, when the determination result by the determination means in the second normal gaming state corresponds to the predetermined determination information and the game transitions to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state, the probability that the transition condition is relaxed by the mitigation means is higher than the probability that a transition condition that is more difficult to achieve than the transition condition previously set by the transition condition setting means is set.

As shown in feature B1, in a configuration in which the game progresses in the order of first normal game state → second normal game state → third normal game state, if there are many occurrences of an event in which a winning result occurs despite a transition to the second normal game state, causing the transition to the third normal game state to become distant, the game in the second normal game state is likely to seem drawn out. This can be an obstacle to increasing attention to the game. Here, as shown in this feature, by making the rate at which the hurdle is lowered higher than the rate at which the hurdle is raised when a winning result occurs during the second normal game state, it is possible to use multiple normal game states in combination while making the step-up of the game state smooth.

Feature B6. The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (lower operating port 62a) arranged in a first flow path (left route) in the game area, and a second starting ball entry section (right operating port 63a) arranged in a second flow path (right route) different from the first flow path;
As the transition condition, a first transition condition (for example, the number of time-saving times "50") and a second transition condition (for example, the number of time-saving times "30", "10", "0") that is easier to meet than the first transition condition are provided,
the mitigation means is configured such that, when the special information corresponding to a ball scoring in the second starting ball scoring section results in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the proportion of setting the second transition condition as the transition condition is higher than when the special information corresponding to a ball scoring in the first starting ball scoring section results in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information;
A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B5, characterized in that in the first normal gaming state, the judgment means has more opportunities to make a judgment if the gaming ball is launched into the first flow path rather than the second flow path, and in the second normal gaming state, the judgment means has more opportunities to make a judgment if the gaming ball is launched into the second flow path rather than the first flow path.

According to feature B6, when a game ball is launched into the first flow path in the first normal game state, a lottery for transition to the special game state is executed based on the ball entering the first start ball entry section. If the lottery is won and the game state transitions to the second normal game state, the first transition condition, which is relatively difficult to achieve, is likely to be set. In contrast, after the transition to the second normal game state, the game ball is launched into the second flow path, and the main ball entry destination of the game ball becomes the second start ball entry section. If a lottery for transition to the special game state is executed based on the ball entering the second start ball entry section, the lottery is won, and the game state returns to the second normal game state via the special game state, the second transition condition, which is relatively easy to achieve, is likely to be set as the transition condition. With this configuration, the existing configuration of the gaming machine can be used to preferably embody the technical idea shown in feature B1 while avoiding the complexity of the configuration, etc.

Feature B7. A plurality of the second transition conditions are provided;
The gaming machine described in feature B6 is characterized in that the mitigation means is configured so that when special information corresponding to a ball entering the second start entry section results in a judgment result corresponding to the specified judgment information, the probability that the transition condition that is the easiest to satisfy among the multiple second transition conditions will be set as the transition condition is higher than the probability that other transition conditions will be set.

The configuration described in this feature increases the opportunities for the transition condition set when the second normal gaming state is looped to be met more easily than the transition condition set when the game first transitioned to the second normal gaming state. This allows the mitigation function described in feature B1 to be optimally exercised.

Feature B8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B7, characterized in that it is provided with a corresponding information display means for displaying transition condition corresponding information corresponding to the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means.

In configurations where the transition conditions can be relaxed, such as those shown in feature B1, displaying transition condition information corresponding to the transition conditions can contribute to increasing attention to the game.

The technical ideas shown in Features B1 to B8 may also be applied to the above Group A of Features.

<Characteristics Group C>
The following feature C group was made with a view to solving a problem that the invention aims to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." The background technology is as follows: "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature C1. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is entered into a starting ball entry section (e.g., a right operation port 63a) provided in the game area;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g., winning information);
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a display unit (e.g., an operating port display unit DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit;
a game round control means (e.g., a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display means to start variable display of a picture on the picture display means prior to the judgment being made by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment, and ending the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning the game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the determination means corresponding to predetermined determination information and the game number control means stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of the determination;
A switching means (electric device 71) for switching between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A switching control means for controlling the switching means (a function for executing a process for supporting electric power by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided.
a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which a period of time in the non-acceptance state is shorter than that in the first switching mode are provided as switching control modes of the switching means by the switching control means;
a high probability mode in which the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively high, and a low probability mode in which the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively low,
As the normal game states, a first normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, a second normal game state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, and a third normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode are provided;
the second normal gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to a player than the first normal gaming state and more disadvantageous to a player than the third normal gaming state;
a first transition means for transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state via the special game state when a determination result by the determination means in the first normal game state corresponds to predetermined determination information (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the second normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A reference number setting means (a function of setting the number of time-saving times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number (number of time-saving times) when the first normal game state is shifted to the second normal game state;
and a second transition means (a function of executing processing to transition to the third normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state when the number of games played in the second normal game state reaches the reference number.

According to feature C1, when the number of plays reaches a reference number in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode without resulting in a winning result, the game transitions to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode upon reaching the reference number of plays. The third normal game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. In other words, if the high probability mode (advantageous game state) is entered but the player is unable to benefit from it, the game can be advanced to the third normal game state to play more advantageously. By providing relief to the player with such a configuration, a decline in motivation to play can be suppressed.

The third normal game state shown in this characteristic corresponds to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, and is differentiated from the second normal game state by the different combinations of the switching control mode and the judgment mode. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the game while preventing the game configuration from becoming excessively complicated, and it is possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game.

Feature C2. The game is provided with a special ball entry section (lower variable winning device 65) into which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the special ball entry section is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the starting ball entry section;
The starting ball entry section is disposed on a predetermined flow path (right route) leading to the special ball entry section in the game area, and the starting ball entry section is configured to be in the receiving state so that the flow of the ball down to the special ball entry section via the predetermined flow path is restricted.
The gaming machine described in feature C1 is configured such that in the third normal gaming state, compared to the second normal gaming state, the opportunity for a gaming ball launched into the specified flow path to enter the starting ball entry section is reduced, while the opportunity for the ball to enter the special ball entry section is increased.

According to feature C2, in the second normal game state, the starting ball entry section restricts ball entry into the special ball entry section, which is set to have a higher advantage than the starting ball entry section, and the restriction is relaxed by transitioning to the third normal game state. In this way, the advantage of the third normal game state over the second normal game state can be secured by increasing the opportunities for ball entry into the special ball entry section.

Feature C3. The predetermined judgment information includes first information (information corresponding to a big win result) and second information (information corresponding to a special win result),
the second transition means is configured to transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state when the number of games executed in the second normal game state without a determination result corresponding to the first information reaches the reference number of games;
A special ball entry section (lower variable winning device 65) that can be switched between an entry state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-entry state in which it is more difficult to enter than the entry state;
When the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the second information, a goal entry control means (a function of executing an opening and closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) switches the special goal entry section to the receiving state;
a payout device (222) for paying out a first predetermined number of game balls based on a ball entering the start ball entry section, and for paying out a second predetermined number of game balls greater than the first predetermined number based on a ball entering the special ball entry section;
The starting ball entry section is disposed on a predetermined flow path (right route) leading to the special ball entry section in the game area, and the starting ball entry section is configured to be in the receiving state so that the flow of the ball down to the special ball entry section via the predetermined flow path is restricted.
The gaming machine described in feature C1 is characterized in that in the third normal gaming state, the proportion of gaming balls that enter the special ball entry section among the gaming balls launched toward the specified flow path is increased compared to the second normal gaming state.

According to feature C3, in the second normal game state, the starting ball entry section restricts ball entry into the special ball entry section, which is set to have a higher advantage than the starting ball entry section, and the restriction is relaxed by transitioning to the third normal game state. In this way, the advantage of the third normal game state over the second normal game state can be secured by increasing the opportunities for ball entry into the special ball entry section.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to Feature C3, further comprising a means for maintaining the switching control mode in the switching control mode before the transition to the special gaming state when the determination by the determination means corresponds to the second information.

The configuration shown in this feature makes it possible to increase the difference in the frequency of balls being scored between the case where a judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained during the second normal game state and the case where a judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained during the third normal game state. This is preferable in terms of emphasizing the superiority of the special ball scoring section, as shown in feature C2, etc.

Feature C5. The reference number setting means is a first setting means,
A gaming machine as described in Feature C3 or Feature C4, characterized in that it is provided with a second setting means (a function of resetting the number of time-saving times in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 when transitioning from the second normal game state to the second normal game state via the first special game state) for newly setting a reference number of times (number of time-saving times) when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes a judgment result corresponding to the first information before the reference number of times is reached and the special game state is passed over to the second normal game state.

According to feature C5, if a winning result occurs before the rescue function is activated and the game returns to the second normal game state via the special game state, the reference number of times is reset. This makes it possible to prevent the rescue function shown in feature C1 from becoming excessive, for example.

Feature C6. The reference number setting means is a first setting means,
A third transition means (a function of executing a process of transitioning to the second normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second normal game state via the special game state when a determination result by the determination means in the third normal game state corresponds to the first information;
A gaming machine described in any one of Features C3 to C5, characterized in that it is equipped with a third setting means (a function of resetting the number of time-saving plays when transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that newly sets the reference number of times when transitioning to the second normal gaming state by the third transition means.

If a winning result occurs during rescue, the game will transition to the second normal game state, and by leaving a path to return to the third normal game state open, it is possible to prevent a rapid decline in the player's motivation to play when the third normal game state ends.

Feature C7. The gaming machine described in Feature C6, characterized in that the third setting means has a means for setting the reference number of times to be less than the reference number of times set by the first setting means.

When the third normal game state is changed to the second normal game state, the reference number of times is comparatively reduced, which prevents the downgrade in game state from becoming a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play.

Feature C8. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is entered into a starting ball entry section (e.g., a right operation port 63a) provided in the game area;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g., winning information);
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a display unit (e.g., an operating port display unit DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit;
a game round control means (e.g., a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display means to start variable display of a picture on the picture display means prior to the judgment being made by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment, and ending the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning the game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the determination means corresponding to predetermined determination information and the game number control means stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of the determination;
A switching means (electric device 71) for switching between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the acceptance state;
A switching control means for controlling the switching means (a function for executing a process for supporting electric power by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided.
a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which a period of time in the non-acceptance state is shorter than that in the first switching mode are provided as switching control modes of the switching means by the switching control means;
a high probability mode in which the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively high, and a low probability mode in which the probability of a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information being obtained is relatively low,
a first transition means for transitioning to a second normal game state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode when a determination result by the determination means in a first normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode corresponds to a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information (a function of executing a process of transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A reference number setting means (a function of setting the number of time-saving times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number (number of time-saving times) when the first transition means transitions from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state;
a second transition means (a function of executing a process of transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning from the second normal game state to a third normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode by switching the switching control mode from the second switching mode to the first switching mode while maintaining the judgment mode in the high probability constant mode when the number of games executed in the second normal game state without a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information reaches the reference number,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second normal game state is configured to be more advantageous to a player than the first normal game state and more disadvantageous to a player than the third normal game state.

According to feature C8, when the number of plays reaches a reference number in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode without resulting in a winning result, the reaching of the reference number triggers a transition to a third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. The third normal game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. In other words, if the high probability mode (advantageous game state) is entered but the player is unable to benefit from it, the state can be upgraded to the third normal game state, allowing the player to play more advantageously. By providing relief to the player with such a configuration, a decline in motivation to play can be suppressed.

The third normal game state shown in this characteristic corresponds to the first switching mode and the high probability mode, and is differentiated from the second normal game state by the different combinations of the switching control mode and the judgment mode. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the game while preventing the game configuration from becoming excessively complicated, and it is possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game.

The technical ideas shown in Features C1 to C8 may also be applied to Features A to B above.

<Feature D group>
The following feature group D was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature D1. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is entered into a starting ball entry section (e.g., a right operation port 63a) provided in the game area;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g., winning information);
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a display unit (e.g., an operating port display unit DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit;
a game round control means (e.g., a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display means to start variable display of a picture on the picture display means prior to the judgment being made by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment, and ending the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning a game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a result of determination corresponding to predetermined determination information and the game number control means stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of the determination,
The starting ball entry section is switchable between an acceptance state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the game ball and a non-acceptance state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than in the acceptance state,
A switching control means for controlling the switching means (a function for executing a process for supporting electric power by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which a period of time in the non-acceptance state is shorter than that in the first switching mode are provided as switching control modes by the switching control means,
As the normal gaming state, a first type normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and a second type normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode are provided,
A reference number setting means (a function of setting the number of time-saving times by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (time-saving times) as the number of times of games for which the second type normal game state is continued when the game state is transitioned to the second type normal game state;
A first transition means (a function of executing a transition process to a third normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of transitioning from the second type normal game state to a game state more advantageous to the player than the second type normal game state;
a second transition means (a function of executing a transition process to a first normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of transitioning from the second type normal gaming state to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second type normal gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state is transitioned by either the first transition means or the second transition means when the number of games executed in the second type normal gaming state reaches the reference number.

In the second type normal game state, it becomes easier to score in the starting scoring area, and the game progresses smoothly. When the number of games played in this second type normal game state reaches a reference number, the game state transitions to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second type normal game state, or a game state that is less advantageous to the player. In this way, diversifying the game can prevent the game from becoming monotonous, which contributes to increasing attention to the game.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is entered into a starting ball entry section (e.g., a right operation port 63a) provided in the game area;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g., winning information);
A pattern display means (e.g., a main display unit 81) having a display unit (e.g., an operating port display unit DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit;
a game round control means (e.g., a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display means to start variable display of a picture on the picture display means prior to the judgment being made by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment, and ending the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a special game state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning a game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning a game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a result of determination corresponding to predetermined determination information and the game number control means stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of the determination,
The normal game states include a first normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode), a second normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, a third normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state, and a fourth normal game state (a fourth normal game state corresponding to a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state,
A first setting means (a function of setting the number of time-saving times in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 in response to the transition to the second normal gaming state) for setting a reference number of times (number of time-saving times) as the number of times the second normal gaming state will continue when the state transitions to the second normal gaming state;
A first transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the third normal gaming state when the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number;
A second setting means (a function of setting the number of time-saving games in response to the transition to the fourth normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting the reference number of games as the number of games for which the fourth normal gaming state will continue when the fourth normal gaming state is transitioned to;
and a second transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the first normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the first normal game state when the number of games played in the fourth normal game state reaches the reference number.

When the number of plays performed in the second normal game state reaches a reference number, the player transitions (promotes) to a third normal game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. In contrast, when the number of plays performed in the fourth normal game state reaches a reference number, the player transitions (demotes) to the first normal game state. In the second normal game state, the player plays in the hope of reaching the reference number, while in the fourth normal game state, the player plays in the hope of avoiding reaching the reference number. In this way, even if the same reference number is set, the game state after reaching the reference number is divided into advantageous and unfavorable depending on the game state, which prevents the game from becoming monotonous and contributes to increasing attention to the game.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a game board on which a game area is formed, special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters a starting ball entry section provided in the game area, acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, judgment means for sequentially judging whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information, a picture display means having a display unit and capable of variably displaying a picture on the display unit, and a game round in which the picture display means starts to display a variable picture before the judgment is made by the judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the judgment means, displays a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment, and ends the variable display of the picture, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is stored in the acquired information storage means. A game machine comprising: a game round control means for controlling the picture display means so that a picture for each game round is variably displayed in accordance with information; and a special game state transition means for transitioning the game state to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the predetermined judgment information and the game round control means stops and displays the picture corresponding to the judgment result; the normal game states include a first normal game state, a second normal game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and a third normal game state that is even more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state; and a means for switching the game state between the first normal game state, the second normal game state, and the third normal game state according to the game situation.

Feature D3. The starting ball entry section is switchable between an acceptance state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the ball and a non-acceptance state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the acceptance state.
A switching control means for switching the starting ball entry section between the receiving state and the non-receiving state (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided,
A first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the period of time in the non-acceptance state is shorter than that in the first switching mode are provided as switching control modes by the switching control means,
The first normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state are gaming states in which the switching control mode is the first switching mode,
The second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state are gaming states in which the switching control mode is the second switching mode,
The first setting means is configured to set the reference number of times as a game number for which the second switching mode will be continued in the second normal game state,
The gaming machine described in feature D2, wherein the second setting means is configured to set the reference number of times as the number of times the game will continue in the second switching mode in the fourth normal game state.

As shown in feature D2, in a configuration in which the game state can change to an advantageous/disadvantageous side when the reference number of times is reached, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the number of times remaining until the reference number of times is reached. In this way, if the number of balls in possession is significantly reduced in a situation in which attention to the game is high, it is expected that this, combined with the increased attention to the game, will likely lead to a decrease in motivation to play. Therefore, as shown in this feature, in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the switching control mode is set to the second switching mode, and the reduction in the number of balls in possession can be suppressed, thereby preventing the occurrence of such inconveniences.

In addition, in a configuration in which the game state changes when a reference number of times is reached, there is concern that the game progress may become protracted during this process, reducing the impact and hindering the effect of increasing attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the game progress until the reference number of times is reached is smoothed, and such concerns can be suitably alleviated.

Feature D4. The gaming machine described in Feature D3, characterized in that the game play control means is configured so that the variable display period of the image in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state is shorter than the variable display period of the image in the first normal game state.

As shown in feature D3, if the player can play in the second and fourth normal game states while minimizing the loss of balls, it will be easier for the player to focus their attention on whether or not the reference number of times has been reached. In such a situation, if the variable display period of the image is shortened, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from becoming overly fatigued in the process of reaching the reference number of times, which would otherwise be caused by the game being drawn out and the tension continuing. This is a preferable configuration for achieving the attention-increasing effect shown in feature D2, etc., by setting the reference number of times to a certain degree.

Feature D5. The gaming machine described in any one of Features D2 to D4, characterized in that the determination means is configured such that the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information when making the determination in the second normal gaming state is different from the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information when making the determination in the fourth normal gaming state.

According to feature D5, even if the same reference number of times is set, there will be a difference in the probability of reaching the reference number of times when transitioning to the third normal game state via the second normal game state and when transitioning to the first normal game state via the fourth normal game state. This makes it possible to more effectively suppress monotony in gameplay.

Feature D6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features D2 to D5, characterized in that the determination means is configured so that the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information when making the determination in the second normal gaming state is higher than the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information when making the determination in the fourth normal gaming state.

According to feature D6, even if the same reference number of times is set, there will be a difference in the probability of reaching the reference number of times when transitioning to the third normal game state via the second normal game state and when transitioning to the first normal game state via the fourth normal game state. This makes it possible to more effectively suppress monotony in gameplay.

In particular, when transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, which is the favorable side, the possibility of reaching the reference number of times is relatively low, and when transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, which is the unfavorable side, the possibility of reaching the reference number of times is relatively high. With this configuration, even if the same reference number of times is assumed to be reached, the hurdle for transitioning to the third normal game state can be made relatively high, and anticipation for the transition to the third normal game state can be favorably aroused.

Feature D7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features D2 to D6, characterized in that when the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state are in effect, it is difficult or impossible for the player to distinguish whether the state is the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state.

According to feature D7, by making it unclear (difficult to specify) whether the second or fourth normal game state is being played, a game of guessing whether the game state to be transitioned to after the reference number of times is reached will be the first or third normal game state is added. Since it is unclear whether the game state will be transitioned to the advantageous or unfavorable side, i.e., whether the game state will be promoted or demoted, until the reference number of times is reached, this contributes to further increasing the attention when the reference number of times is reached.

Feature D8. A means for executing a predetermined effect corresponding to the second normal gaming state over a plurality of game times executed in the second normal gaming state when the second normal gaming state is in effect;
A gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D7, characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing the specified presentation when the fourth normal gaming state is reached.

As shown in feature D8, the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state execute the same display effect (predetermined effect), and by making it unclear (difficult to specify) which normal game state it is, a game of guessing whether the game state to transition to after the reference number of times is reached will be the first normal game state or the third normal game state is added. Since it is unclear whether the game state will transition to the advantageous or unfavorable side, i.e., whether the game state will be promoted or demoted, until the reference number of times is reached, this can contribute to further increasing the attention when the reference number of times is reached.

Feature D9. The predetermined judgment information includes first judgment information (information corresponding to a special jackpot result) and second judgment information (information corresponding to a normal jackpot result),
a means for transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state via the special game state when a determination result by the determination means in the first normal game state corresponds to the first determination information;
A gaming machine as described in feature D7 or feature D8, characterized in that it is provided with a means for transitioning from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state via the special game state when a judgment result by the judgment means in the first normal game state becomes a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information.

When a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information is obtained in the first normal game state, the game state transitions to the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state. By standardizing the transition pattern from the first normal game state to the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which game state the game state is in before transitioning to the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state. This allows the attention-increasing effect shown in feature D7 etc. to be optimally exerted.

Feature D10. A variable ball entry section that can be switched between an entry state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the ball and a non-entry state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the entry state;
and a ball entry control means for switching the variable ball entry section to the receiving state when the special game state is established,
The gaming machine described in feature D9 is characterized in that the ball entry control means is configured so that the switching mode of the variable ball entry section is common between the special game state to which the game state is entered when a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is reached and the special game state to which the game state is entered when a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is reached.

As shown in feature D10, by making the behavior of the variable ball entry section common when transitioning to the second normal game state and when transitioning to the fourth normal game state, it is possible to avoid revealing whether the transition is to the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state from the behavior of the variable ball entry section. This allows the effect shown in feature D9 to be optimally exerted.

Feature D11. A suggestion means for suggesting the remaining number of times until the reference number of times is reached is provided,
The suggestion means provides a first suggestion mode in which the remaining number of times is indicated clearly and a second suggestion mode in which the remaining number of times is not indicated clearly,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D7 to D10, characterized in that the suggestion means is switchable between the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode.

In a configuration in which the player is divided into advantageous and unfavorable sides depending on the number of times a certain number of times has been reached, as shown in feature D7, etc., the remaining number of times until the reference number of times is reached can be switched between being clearly indicated and not clearly indicated, thereby making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game in the process leading up to the reference number of times being reached.

The technical ideas shown in Features D1 to D11 may also be applied to the above Features A to C.

<Features Group E>
The following feature E group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means which launches gaming balls into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. When a gaming ball launched from the gaming ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to increase attention to the game."

Feature E1. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A first ball entry section (lower variable winning device 65) that is provided in the game area and can be switched between an entry state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the ball and a non-entry state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than in the entry state;
A second ball entry section (right-side operating ball entry section 63) is disposed on a predetermined flow path (right route) leading to the first ball entry section in the game area, and can be switched between an entry state in which a game ball flowing down along the predetermined flow path can enter the ball entry section and a non-entry state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball entry section than in the entry state.
A predetermined information acquisition means (a function of acquiring the value of the open random number counter C4 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring predetermined information (the value of the open random number counter C4) when the game ball passes through a predetermined passage part (through gate 66) arranged in the game area;
An information storage means (electrical storage area 633 in RAM 604 of main control device 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means;
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to switch the second ball entry section to the receiving state based on the predetermined information stored in the information storage means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A variable display means (main display unit 81) having a display section (through gate display section DS) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
A display control means (a function of executing a display process of a pattern in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that starts a variable display of a pattern on the display unit prior to the lottery by the lottery means or based on the lottery being performed by the lottery means and displays a pattern corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means;
A switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening process in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) switches the second winning section to the receiving state when a picture corresponding to the winning result is confirmed and displayed on the display unit,
As the switching control modes by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which a ball is more likely to enter the game than in the first switching mode are provided,
the display control means is configured so that a second specific period, which is a sum of a variable display period and a fixed display period of the pattern in the second switching mode, is shorter than a first specific period, which is a sum of a variable display period and a fixed display period of the pattern in the first switching mode;
A ball entering the first ball entry section is configured to be more advantageous to a player than a ball entering the second ball entry section,
The second ball entrance section has an opening (operating opening 63a) through which a plurality of game balls can pass simultaneously and a shutter (shutter 331) for opening and closing the opening, and is configured to be in the non-receiving state when the shutter is placed in a closed position and to be in the receiving state when the shutter is placed in an open position.
When the second ball entrance portion is in the non-receiving state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter,
A gaming machine characterized in that the period required for a gaming ball flowing down the specified flow path to pass over the shutter is configured to be longer than the second specific period and shorter than the first specific period.

According to feature E1, the required period for a game ball flowing down a specified flow path to pass over the shutter is longer than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the image in the second switching mode (second specific period). Therefore, most of the game balls that reach the second ball entry section during the second switching mode will enter the second ball entry section. In other words, game balls launched into a specified flow path during the second switching mode flow into the second ball entry section and are prevented from entering the first ball entry section. On the other hand, the required period is shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the image in the first switching mode (first specific period). Therefore, even if the second ball entry section is continuously switched to the receiving state during the first switching mode, some of the game balls that reach the shutter will pass through the second ball entry section and head to the first ball entry section. In this way, during the first switching mode, the ball will land in the relatively advantageous first ball entry area, while during the second switching mode, balls will not be allowed to land in the first ball entry area, resulting in a clear difference in the progress of the game.

Here, in order to differentiate between the switching modes, the specific period can be shortened to reduce the number of game balls (spills) that pass through the second ball entry section and head toward the first ball entry section during the second switching mode. However, simply shortening the specific period makes it difficult to launch/stop balls according to the results displayed on the display section (to advance the game in a way that gives the player even the slightest advantage), and the significance of having a display section is diminished. In this regard, the configuration shown in this characteristic makes it possible to prevent the variable display period and fixed display period of the image from becoming extremely short while suppressing the above-mentioned spills. This makes it possible to ideally increase the attention paid to the game.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1, characterized in that the switching control means is configured to switch the second ball entry section to the receiving state based on the lottery result by the lottery means, regardless of whether the first ball entry section is in the receiving state or not.

As shown in feature E2, in a configuration in which the first ball entry section is sometimes in a receiving state and sometimes not depending on the lottery result, the player's attention is more likely to be drawn to the display of the lottery result. In such a configuration, there is technical significance in applying the technical idea shown in feature E1 to prevent the specific period from becoming extremely short.

Feature E3. A payout means (payout device 222) is provided that pays out a first predetermined number (e.g., 10 balls) of game balls based on the entry of balls into the first ball entry section, and pays out a second predetermined number (e.g., 1 ball) of game balls that is less than the first predetermined number based on the entry of balls into the second ball entry section;
A gaming machine described in feature E1 or feature E2, characterized in that due to the difference in the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means, landing in the first ball entry section is more advantageous to the player than landing in the second ball entry section.

As shown in feature E3, in a configuration in which a ball entering the first ball entry section is favored over a ball entering the second ball entry section, it is assumed that the player plays the game in the hope of the ball entering the first ball entry section. In such a configuration, excessive balls entering the first ball entry section is undesirable because it can cause the game to lose balance. In this respect, by combining it with feature E1, the period during which the second ball entry section is in a receiving state can be shortened as much as possible while avoiding the movement of game balls toward the first ball entry section, so that the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed. Furthermore, shortening the period in the receiving state is advantageous in encouraging the player's expectation that the game ball will flow down toward the first ball entry section, and it is possible to suitably suppress the reduction in the player's expectation of the ball entering the first ball entry section due to the period in the receiving state being extended.

Feature E4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E3, characterized in that the passage length of the communication passage section connecting the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section in the specified flow path is shorter than the passage length of the passage section formed by the shutter of the second ball entry section in the specified flow path.

As shown in feature E4, by making the passage length of the connecting passage shorter than the above-mentioned passage length relating to the second ball entry section, it becomes easier to give the player the impression that a game ball that reaches the second ball entry section when the first ball entry section is open can immediately enter the first ball entry section if it simply passes through the second ball entry section, which contributes to increasing attention to the shutter of the second ball entry section and the behavior of the game ball that reaches the first ball entry section.

Feature E5. The first ball entry section has an opening (big prize entry opening) through which multiple game balls can pass at the same time and a shutter (shutter) that opens and closes the opening, and is configured to be in the non-accepting state when the shutter is placed in the closed position and in the accepting state when the shutter is placed in the open position;
When the first ball entry section is in the non-receiving state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by a shutter of the first ball entry section,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the passage length of a connecting passage section connecting the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section in the specified flow path is shorter than both the passage length of the passage section formed by the shutter of the first ball entry section in the specified flow path and the passage length of the passage section formed by the shutter of the second ball entry section in the specified flow path.

Because most of the game balls flowing down a specified flow path can land in either the first or second ball entry section, it is possible to make it appear as if a single large ball entry section is constructed by combining the first and second ball entry sections. Making it appear as if the large ball entry section ensures a chance for game balls to enter the ball is advantageous in terms of improving the player's satisfaction. Here, by making the passage length of the connecting passage section shorter than the passage length of the passage sections formed by each shutter, the sense of unity between the two ball entry sections can be enhanced. This can strengthen the above impression.

In addition, by making the passage length of the communication passage shorter than the above-mentioned passage length relating to the second ball entry section, it becomes easier to give the player the impression that a game ball that reaches the second ball entry section when the first ball entry section is open can immediately enter the first ball entry section if it can simply pass through the second ball entry section, which contributes to increasing attention to the shutter of the second ball entry section and the behavior of the game ball that reaches the first ball entry section.

Feature E6. The first ball entry section has an opening (a large prize entry opening) through which a plurality of game balls can pass simultaneously and a shutter (a shutter) for opening and closing the opening, and is configured to be in the non-accepting state when the shutter is placed in the closed position and in the accepting state when the shutter is placed in the open position;
When the first ball entry section is in the non-receiving state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by a shutter of the first ball entry section,
A gaming machine described in feature E4 or feature E5, characterized in that the shutter of the first ball entry section and the shutter of the second ball entry section extend in a predetermined direction and the connecting passage section extends in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction.

As described above, if the configuration is such that most of the game balls flowing down a specified flow path can enter either the first or second entry section, a single large entry section can be constructed by combining the first and second entry sections. Making it appear as if the large entry section ensures an opportunity for game balls to enter the ball is advantageous in terms of improving the player's satisfaction.

In this type of large ball entry section, when the main ball entry destination is switched between the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section depending on the situation, the possibility of the game hall suffering a disadvantage increases if a ball enters the first ball entry section in a situation where a ball should not enter the first ball entry section. In consideration of such circumstances, there is a technical significance in providing a communication passage between the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section to delay or thin out the movement of game balls toward the first ball entry section. Although these functions can be optimally exercised by making the communication passage longer to a certain extent, on the other hand, there is a concern that the sense of unity of both ball entry sections will be reduced and the impression that it is one large ball entry section will be weaker. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by configuring the shutters of both ball entry sections to extend in a predetermined direction and the communication passage section to extend in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction, and by shifting the positions of the ball entry sections (for example, offsetting them up and down), it is possible to reduce the decrease in the sense of unity of both ball entry sections while increasing the passage length of the communication passage.

Feature E7. At the most downstream portion of the play area, an outlet (outlet 68) through which game balls are discharged from the play area is formed,
The gaming machine described in feature E6 is characterized in that a branch passage section is formed at a midpoint of the communication passage section, and gaming balls that flow into the branch passage section are discharged from the gaming area without reaching the discharge outlet.

Game balls that flow into the branch passage section located midway through the connecting passage section are discharged directly from the game area, avoiding reaching the first ball entry section. By configuring in this way that some of the game balls that pass through the second ball entry section are discharged from the game area without flowing into the first ball entry section, the impression of the first large ball entry section can be strengthened compared to a configuration in which game balls that flow into the branch passage section head toward the above-mentioned discharge outlet.

Feature E8. In the portion of the predetermined flow path where the passage portion is formed by the shutter of the second ball entrance portion, a deceleration portion (protrusion portion 335a, 336a) that decelerates the game ball is provided,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E4 to E7, characterized in that the speed reduction section is arranged in a position closer to the communication passage section.

In a configuration in which the first ball entry section is favored over the second ball entry section to give the player an advantage, the launch operation is performed in the hope that the game ball will pass through the second ball entry section and head toward the first ball entry section, and it is assumed that the player's attention will be drawn more easily to the movement of the game ball from the second ball entry section to the connecting passage section. Here, in a configuration in which a deceleration section is provided in the passage section formed by the shutter to extend the time required for passage, the deceleration section is positioned so as to be biased toward the connecting passage section, making it easier for the player to follow the movement of the game ball with their eyes in areas where the player's attention is likely to be drawn. This can contribute to further increasing attention.

Feature E9. The first ball entry section is configured to switch to the receiving state based on a ball entering the second ball entry section,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that the period during which the second ball entry section is in the receiving state in the first switching mode is configured to be shorter than the period required for a gaming ball to pass through a portion of the specified flow path in which a passage portion is formed by the shutter of the second ball entry section and shorter than the period during which the first ball entry section is in the receiving state.

As shown by this feature, even if the period during which the second ball entry section is in the receiving state in the first switching mode is set shorter than the period required for a game ball to pass through the portion of the specified flow path where the passage portion is formed by the shutter of the second ball entry section, game balls located above the shutter will enter the first ball entry section when the first ball entry section switches to the receiving state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period of the receiving state to increase the number of game balls moving to the first ball entry section, while still ensuring that the balls enter the second ball entry section.

In addition, the period during which the second ball entry section is in a receiving state in the first switching mode is set to be shorter than the period during which the first ball entry section is in a receiving state, so that it is easier to understand from the behavior of the two ball entry sections that a situation is likely to result in a ball entry into the first ball entry section, making it easier to direct the player's attention to balls entering the first ball entry section.

Feature E10. A game board (game board 60) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A first acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a ball is entered into a starting ball entry portion (e.g., a right operation port 63a) provided in the game area;
A first storage means (a reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the first acquisition means;
A first determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the first storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g., winning information);
A first display unit (e.g., an operating port display unit DR) capable of variably displaying a picture;
a first display control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the display of the first display unit so that the variable display of the picture for each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the first display control means starting a variable display of the picture on the first display unit prior to the determination by the first determination means or based on the determination being made by the first determination means, displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination, and ending the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round;
A special ball entry section (lower variable winning device 65) is provided in the game area and can be switched between an entry state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the game area and a non-entry state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than in the entry state;
a first switching control means (a function of executing an opening and closing process of the lower variable winning device 65 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the special winning section to the receiving state based on the judgment result by the first judgment means being a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information and the first display control means stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the judgment result;
The starting ball entry section is disposed on a predetermined flow path (right route) leading to the special ball entry section, and is switchable between an acceptance state in which a game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path can enter the ball and a non-acceptance state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the acceptance state.
A second acquisition means (a function of acquiring the value of the open random number counter C4 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring predetermined information (the value of the open random number counter C4) when the game ball passes through a predetermined passage part (through gate 66) provided in the game area;
A second storage means (electrical storage area 633 in RAM 604 of main control device 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the second acquisition means;
A second determination means (a function of executing a support lottery in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that determines whether or not to switch the starting ball entry section to the receiving state based on the predetermined information stored in the second storage means;
A second display unit (a through gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a picture;
A second display control means (a function of executing a display process of a pattern in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that starts a variable display of a pattern on the second display unit prior to the judgment by the second judgment means or based on the judgment by the second judgment means, and displays a pattern corresponding to the judgment result by the second judgment means;
A second switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) switches the start winning section to the receiving state when a picture corresponding to the winning result is confirmed and displayed on the second display section,
As the switching control mode by the second switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the period during which the starting ball entry section is in the non-receiving state is shorter than that in the first switching mode are provided;
the second display control means is configured so that a second specific period, which is a sum of a variable display period and a fixed display period of the picture in the second display unit when in the second switching mode, is shorter than a first specific period, which is a sum of a variable display period and a fixed display period of the picture in the second display unit when in the first switching mode;
a payout device (222) for paying out a first predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 1 ball) based on a ball entering the start ball entry section, and for paying out a second predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) greater than the first predetermined number based on a ball entering the special ball entry section;
The starting ball entry section has an opening (right operating opening 63a) through which a plurality of game balls can pass simultaneously and a shutter (shutter 331) for opening and closing the opening, and is configured to be in the non-accepting state when the shutter is placed in a closed position, and to be in the accepting state when the shutter is placed in an open position.
When the starting ball entry section is in the non-receiving state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter,
A gaming machine characterized in that the period required for a gaming ball flowing down the specified flow path to pass over the shutter is configured to be longer than the second specific period and shorter than the first specific period.

According to feature E10, the required period for a game ball flowing down a specified flow path to pass over the shutter is longer than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the image in the second switching mode (second specific period). Therefore, most of the game balls that reach the second ball entry section during the second switching mode will enter the second ball entry section. In other words, game balls launched into a specified flow path during the second switching mode flow into the second ball entry section, and ball entry into the first ball entry section is suppressed. On the other hand, the required period is shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the image in the first switching mode (first specific period). Therefore, even if the second ball entry section is continuously switched to the receiving state during the first switching mode, some of the game balls that reach the shutter will pass through the second ball entry section and head toward the first ball entry section. In this way, during the first switching mode, the ball will land in the relatively advantageous first ball entry area, while during the second switching mode, balls will not be allowed to land in the first ball entry area, resulting in a clear difference in the progress of the game.

Here, in order to differentiate between the switching modes, the specific period can be shortened to reduce the number of game balls (spills) that pass through the second ball entry section and head toward the first ball entry section during the second switching mode. However, simply shortening the specific period makes it difficult to launch/stop balls according to the results displayed on the display section (to advance the game to an advantage), and the significance of having a display section is diminished. In this regard, the configuration shown in this characteristic makes it possible to prevent the variable display period and fixed display period of the image from becoming extremely short while suppressing the above-mentioned spills. This makes it possible to ideally increase the attention paid to the game.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas described in Features E2 to E9 above to this feature.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features E1 to E10 may be applied to the above Features A to D.

<Feature Group F>
The following feature group F was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will be generated, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stopped state on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature F1. A starting ball entry section (operation opening 62a, 63a) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a process for determining whether or not a win has been made in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (a big win result or a special win result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display parts DL, DR by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined display part (the operation port display parts DL, DR of the main display unit 81) so that the game round operation is performed, with the end of the game round operation being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and a notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is obtained;
Based on the judgment result of the transition judgment means, an execution period determination means (a function of determining a variable display time by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided for determining the execution period of the game operation.
A setting value determination means (a function of switching the lottery table by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a set value changing means (a setting change switch attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means,
As the normal game state, a first game state (e.g., a first normal game state) in which the execution period of the game-use operation is relatively long, and a second game state (e.g., a second normal game state or a third normal game state) in which the execution period of the game-use operation is relatively short are provided,
In the first gaming state, the rate of a non-corresponding result that does not correspond to the predetermined transition information is higher than the rate of the transition corresponding result in the judgment result by the transition judgment means, and in the second gaming state, the rate of a non-corresponding result that does not correspond to the predetermined transition information is higher than the rate of the transition corresponding result in the judgment result by the transition judgment means,
A difference between the ratios of the non-corresponding results in the determination results by the transition determination means and the set values is configured to be larger in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution period determination means is configured to determine the execution period so that the execution period of the game-round operation in a game round that results in the non-compatible result in the second game state is longer than the execution period of the game-round operation in a game round that results in the non-compatible result in the first game state.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the setting value, so one of the fun things is to play while guessing the setting value. In the second gaming state, the rate of non-corresponding results is low, and the difference in the rate of non-corresponding results between the setting values is larger than in the first gaming state. In other words, the second gaming state is advantageous in guessing the setting value. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the execution period of the game-use operation is shortened by transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and the game progress is accelerated, thereby suppressing monotony of the game. By shortening in this way, if a non-corresponding result is overlooked, the accuracy of the setting value guess is greatly reduced. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the execution period of the game-use operation in the game round that resulted in a non-corresponding result in the second gaming state is longer than the execution period of the game-use operation in the game round that resulted in a non-corresponding result in the first gaming state, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. This can suitably contribute to increasing the attention to the game.

Feature F2. A starting ball entry section (operation opening 62a, 63a) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a process for determining whether or not a win has been made in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display parts DL, DR by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined display part (the operation port display parts DL, DR of the main display unit 81) so that the game round operation is performed, with the end of the game round operation being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and a notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is obtained;
Based on the judgment result of the transition judgment means, an execution period determination means (a function of determining a variable display time by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided for determining the execution period of the game operation.
A setting value determination means (a function of switching the lottery table by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a set value changing means (a setting change switch attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means,
As the normal game state, a first game state (e.g., a first normal game state) in which the execution period of the game-use operation is relatively long, and a second game state (e.g., a second normal game state or a third normal game state) in which the execution period of the game-use operation is relatively short are provided,
The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (lower operating port 62a) arranged in a first flow path (left route) in the game area and a second starting ball entry section (right operating port 63a) arranged in a second flow path (right route) in the game area.
In the first gaming state, a gaming ball is launched into the first flow path, so that the rate of non-corresponding results that do not correspond to the specified transition information is higher than the rate of transition-corresponding results in the judgment results by the transition judgment means; and in the second gaming state, a gaming ball is launched into the second flow path, so that the rate of non-corresponding results in the judgment results by the transition judgment means is higher than the rate of transition-corresponding results,
a difference between the set values of the ratio of the non-corresponding result in the judgment result by the transition judgment means is configured to be larger in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the execution period determination means is configured to determine the execution period of the game-round action in a game round that results in the non-compatible result in the second game state so that the execution period of the game-round action in a game round that results in the non-compatible result in the first game state is longer than the execution period of the game-round action in a game round that results in the non-compatible result in the first game state.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the setting value, so one of the fun things is to play while guessing the setting value. In the second gaming state, the rate of non-corresponding results is low, and the difference in the rate of non-corresponding results between the setting values is larger than in the first gaming state. In other words, the second gaming state is advantageous in guessing the setting value. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the execution period of the game-use operation is shortened by transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and the game progress is accelerated, thereby suppressing monotony of the game. By shortening in this way, if a non-corresponding result is overlooked, the accuracy of the setting value guess is greatly reduced. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the execution period of the game-use operation in the game round that resulted in a non-corresponding result in the second gaming state is longer than the execution period of the game-use operation in the game round that resulted in a non-corresponding result in the first gaming state, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. This can suitably contribute to increasing the attention to the game.

Feature F3. A variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 64, 65) that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the acceptance state;
An opening/closing control means (a function of executing opening/closing processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry means between the receiving state and the non-receiving state when the special game state is in effect,
As the special game states, a first special game state (a special game state corresponding to a big win result) and a second special game state (a special game state corresponding to a special win result) in which the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the receiving state is shorter than that in the first special game state are provided,
The predetermined transition information includes first information (information corresponding to a big win result) and second information (information corresponding to a special win result),
The game state transition means includes:
a means for transitioning a gaming state to the first special gaming state based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a first corresponding result (jackpot result) that corresponds to the first information;
a means for transitioning a gaming state to the second special gaming state based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a second corresponding result (a special winning result) that corresponds to the second information,
the transition determination means is configured so that in the second gaming state, a rate at which the first corresponding result occurs is greater than a rate at which the second corresponding result occurs and a rate at which the non-corresponding result occurs;
The gaming machine described in feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the execution period determination means is configured to determine the execution period of the game-round action in a game round that has resulted in the non-corresponding result in the second gaming state so that the execution period of the game-round action in a game round that has resulted in the second corresponding result in the second gaming state is longer than the execution period of the game-round action in a game round that has resulted in the second corresponding result in the second gaming state.

In the second gaming state, there is a concern that the effects shown in feature F1 and the like above will not be fully realized if game turns resulting in a non-corresponding result are mixed in with the majority of game turns resulting in the second corresponding result. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by differentiating between game turns resulting in a non-corresponding result and game turns resulting in the second corresponding result by making the execution period of the game turn action in a game turn resulting in a non-corresponding result longer than the execution period of the game turn action in a game turn resulting in the second corresponding result, the above concerns can be suitably eliminated.

Feature F4. The execution period determination means is
A means for determining an execution period of the game turn action in the game turn resulting in the first corresponding result in the second game state based on a predetermined execution period determination table;
A gaming machine as described in feature F3, characterized in that it has a means for determining the execution period of the game turn action in a game turn that has resulted in the non-corresponding result in the second gaming state based on the specified execution period determination table.

According to feature F4, it is possible to avoid a difference in the execution period between a game round corresponding to a non-corresponding result and a game round corresponding to a first corresponding result in the second game state. By configuring the game so that the first corresponding result or a non-corresponding result, which offers a large bonus, is determined when a relatively long game round is performed in the second game state, it is possible to appropriately increase attention to the game. This is also a preferable configuration for preventing non-corresponding results from being overlooked.

Feature F5. A picture display means (picture display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
a display control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display means so that a variable display of a picture is performed for each game round according to special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the variable display of a picture being started in the picture display means prior to the judgment being made by the transition judgment means or based on the judgment being made by the transition judgment means, a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment being displayed, and the variable display of the picture being ended, which is counted as one game round;
A reach display is provided as one of the variable display of the patterns executed by the display control means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the reach display is executed in all game turns that result in the non-corresponding result in the second gaming state.

When the reach display is executed, the player's attention to the game is likely to be high. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the reach display is configured to be executed for all game times in the second game state that result in a non-compatible result, it is possible to prevent the non-compatible result from being overlooked. In other words, by configuring the setting value to be suggested when the player's attention is high, it is possible to reduce the chances that the suggestion will be overlooked.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in feature F4, which includes a picture display means (picture display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a), and a display control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process in MPU 602 of main control device 162) that controls the picture display means so that the picture display is variable for each game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with one game round being one in which the game round is started to display a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment or based on the judgment being made by the transition judgment means, and the game round is ended, and a reach display is provided as one of the variable displays of pictures executed by the display control means, and the reach display is executed in all game rounds in which the non-corresponding result and the first corresponding result are obtained in the second game state."

Feature F6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F5, characterized in that it is equipped with a notification means (a function of displaying an effect image EF of the character CA in the character display area CE in the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143) that notifies the player of special information corresponding to the occurrence rate of the non-corresponding result in the second gaming state at least when the second gaming state is in effect.

As described above, in a configuration in which the setting value can be inferred from the occurrence rate of non-corresponding results in the second game state, there is a concern that the accuracy of the setting inference will be significantly reduced due to a reduction in the number of samples caused by overlooking the non-corresponding results, etc. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which special information corresponding to the occurrence rate of non-corresponding results in the second game state is notified, it is possible to ensure that the player has an opportunity to know the occurrence rate of non-corresponding results, etc. after the fact, and it is possible to effectively achieve the effect of increasing attention to the game.

Feature F7. The gaming machine described in Feature F6, wherein the notification means is configured to update the special information when the transition determination means determines that the transition is not supported.

By configuring the special information to be updated when a non-compliant result is obtained, it is possible to create a slight difference in the reliability of the special information between a period when no updates are being made and immediately after an update. This can encourage attention to the special information when a non-compliant result is obtained.

Feature F8. The gaming machine described in Feature F6, characterized in that the notification means is configured to notify the special information over multiple play times in the second gaming state, and is configured to update the special information when the determination result by the transition determination means is the non-compatible result.

By configuring the notification of special information to continue over multiple game rounds, it is possible to increase the opportunities to confirm the special information. Furthermore, by configuring the special information to be updated when an incompatible result occurs, it is possible to create a slight difference in the reliability of the special information between a period when no updates are being made and immediately after an update. This can encourage attention to the special information when an incompatible result occurs.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in feature F6, characterized in that the notification means continues to notify the special information throughout all play times in the second game state, and updates the special information when the transition determination means determines that the transition is not compatible."

Feature F9. A picture display means (picture display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
a display control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display means so that the picture display means starts a variable display of a picture before the transition determination means makes the determination or based on the transition determination means making the determination, displays a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination, and ends the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round, and the picture display means performs a variable display of a picture for each game round in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
a reach display is provided as one of the variable display of the patterns executed by the display control means,
The reach display is executed in all game times resulting in the non-corresponding result in the second game state,
a notification means for notifying, when at least the second gaming state is reached, of special information corresponding to the occurrence rate of the non-corresponding result in the second gaming state on the display screen (a function for displaying an effect image EF of the character CA in the character display area CE in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143);
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the notification means is configured to update the special information after the reach display is completed when the judgment result by the transition judgment means is the non-compatible result.

As described above, in a configuration in which the setting value can be inferred from the occurrence rate of non-corresponding results in the second game state, there is a concern that the accuracy of the setting inference will be significantly reduced due to a reduction in the number of samples caused by overlooking the non-corresponding results, etc. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which special information corresponding to the occurrence rate of non-corresponding results in the second game state is notified, it is possible to ensure that the player has an opportunity to know the occurrence rate of non-corresponding results, etc. after the fact, and it is possible to effectively achieve the effect of increasing attention to the game.

By configuring the special information to be updated when a non-compliant result is obtained, it is possible to create a slight difference in the reliability of the special information between a period when no updates are being made and immediately after an update. This can encourage attention to the special information when a non-compliant result is obtained.

When the reach display is executed, the player's attention to the game is likely to be increased. As shown in this feature, if the reach display is configured to be executed for all game times in the second game state that result in a non-compatible result, it is possible to prevent the non-compatible result from being overlooked. In other words, by configuring the setting value to be suggested when the player's attention is high, it is possible to reduce the chances that the suggestion will be overlooked.

In particular, by configuring the special information to be updated after the reach display is completed, players who want to focus on the reach display can easily visually confirm both the update and the reach display. This is preferable in terms of improving player satisfaction.

Feature F10. A picture display means (picture display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
a display control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the picture display means so that the picture display means starts a variable display of a picture before the transition determination means makes the determination or based on the transition determination means making the determination, displays a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination, and ends the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round, and the picture display means performs a variable display of a picture for each game round in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
a notification means for notifying, when at least the second gaming state is reached, of special information corresponding to the occurrence rate of the non-corresponding result in the second gaming state on the display screen (a function for displaying an effect image EF of the character CA in the character display area CE in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143);
The notification means includes:
An update suggestion means for suggesting that an update of the special information will occur after the variable display of the picture in the game round resulting in the non-corresponding result is completed;
The gaming machine described in feature F9 is characterized in that it has an update execution means for executing the update in a game play following the game play in which the update suggestion means has suggested that an update of the special information will occur.

As shown in feature F10, by suggesting that an update of the special information will occur after the variable display of the image has ended, and by configuring the special information to be updated in the play round following the play round in which the suggestion was made, it is possible to appropriately secure a period for updating the special information while preventing it from being revealed that updating the special information = a non-compatible result until the end of the play round.

Feature F11. The gaming machine described in Feature F10, characterized in that the update suggestion means has a means for changing at least one of the images displayed on the display screen at the end of a game round to an image corresponding to the suggestion.

As shown in feature F11, by changing the image displayed in a stopped state to indicate an update to the special information, it is possible to effectively inform a player who is watching the variable display of the image that the update will occur.

The technical ideas shown in Features F1 to F11 may also be applied to the above Features A to E.

<Feature Group G>
The following feature group G was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will be generated, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stopped state on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature G1. A starting ball entry section (operating port 62a, 63a) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a process for determining whether or not a win has been made in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
A game machine having a game round control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display section by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section DL, DR of the main display unit 81) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended,
As the normal gaming state, a first gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode) and a second gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode) which is more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state are provided,
A display mode changing means (a function of changing the effect level in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143) for changing the display mode (effect level) of a special display (character CA) in a predetermined display section (character display area CE of the display screen 75a) based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (miss result) during the second game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when transitioning from the second game state to the first game state, a display continuation means (a function of causing the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 to continue the display of character CA across game states) is provided which continues the special display so that the display mode changed by the display mode change means is inherited in the first game state.

In the configuration shown in this feature, the display mode of the special display on the specified display unit is changed based on the occurrence of a specified event in the second gaming state. The second gaming state is more favorable to the player than the first gaming state, so there is a possibility that the player will end the game when the second gaming state ends. In other words, it is assumed that most of the candidates when selecting a machine at a gaming hall are in the first gaming state. Here, the display mode of the above-mentioned special display continues to be inherited even after the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. With this configuration, even if the first gaming state is in effect, the occurrence status of the specified event can be grasped after the fact from the display mode of the special display. Continuing the display of information across gaming states in this way can contribute to increasing attention to the game in the first gaming state.

Feature G2. A starting ball entry section (operating port 62a, 63a) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a process for determining whether or not a win has been made in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
A game machine having a game round control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display section by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section DL, DR of the main display unit 81) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended,
A setting value determination means (a function of switching the lottery table by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a set value changing means (a setting change switch attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means,
As the normal gaming state, a first gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode) and a second gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode) which is more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state are provided,
A predetermined event (miss result) occurring in the second gaming state has a different occurrence probability depending on the set value,
A display mode changing means (a function of changing the effect level in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143) for changing the display mode (effect level) of a special display (character CA) in a predetermined display section (character display area CE of the display screen 75a) based on the occurrence of the predetermined event during the second game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when transitioning from the second game state to the first game state, a display continuation means (a function of causing the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 to continue the display of character CA across game states) is provided which continues the special display so that the display mode changed by the display mode change means is inherited in the first game state.

In the configuration shown in this feature, a difference (setting difference) between the set values is set for the probability of a predetermined event occurring in the second gaming state, and the display mode of the special display in the predetermined display unit is changed based on the occurrence of a predetermined event in the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to estimate the setting value of this gaming machine from the display mode of the special display in the second gaming state. Since the second gaming state is favored to be more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state, there is a possibility that the player will end the game when the second gaming state ends. In other words, it is assumed that most of the candidates when selecting a machine in a gaming hall are in the first gaming state. Here, the above-mentioned special display continues to be displayed so that the display mode is inherited even after the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. According to this configuration, when selecting a machine from gaming machines in the first gaming state, the display mode of the special display can be used as an indicator, which can contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature G3. A starting ball entry section (operating port 62a, 63a) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a process for determining whether or not a win has been made in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display section by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section DL, DR of the main display unit 81) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended;
A setting value determination means (a function of switching the lottery table by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a set value changing means (a setting change switch attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means,
As the normal gaming state, a first gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a low probability mode) and a second gaming state (a normal gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode) which is more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state are provided,
A difference is provided in the probability that the result of the determination by the transition determination means in the second gaming state will be a miss result,
A display mode changing means (a function of changing the effect level in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143) for changing the display mode (effect level) of the special display (character CA) in a predetermined display section (character display area CE of the display screen 75a) based on the occurrence of the losing result during the second game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when transitioning from the second game state to the first game state, a display continuation means (a function of continuing the display of character CA across game states in MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143) is provided which continues the special display so that the display mode changed by the display mode change means is inherited in the first game state.

In the configuration shown in this feature, a difference between the setting values (setting difference) is set for the probability of a losing result in the second gaming state, and the display mode of the special display in a specified display unit is changed based on the occurrence of a losing result in the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to infer the setting value of this gaming machine from the display mode of the special display in the second gaming state. Here, a losing result does not transition to the special gaming state and players cannot enjoy benefits such as the payout of game balls, so it tends to attract less attention from players than a result corresponding to a transition. By being able to infer the setting value from the probability of a losing result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the level of attention from players even for play times related to a losing result.

In addition, since the second gaming state is more favorable to the player than the first gaming state, there is a possibility that the player will end the game when the second gaming state ends. In other words, it is assumed that most of the candidates when selecting a machine at an amusement hall are in the first gaming state. Here, the above-mentioned special display continues to be displayed so that the display mode is carried over even after the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. With this configuration, the display mode of the special display can be used as an indicator when selecting a machine from gaming machines in the first gaming state, which can contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature G4. A gaming machine according to Feature G2 or Feature G3, characterized in that in the first gaming state, the display continuation means restricts changes to the display mode of the special display carried over to the first gaming state.

Since changes to the display mode of the special display are restricted after the transition to the second gaming state, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the estimation of the set value from changing depending on the time elapsed since the transition to the first gaming state, the number of games played, etc. This is preferable, for example, in terms of ensuring fairness between players.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in feature G2 or feature G3, in which a first display mode and a second display mode are provided as the display modes of the special display, and in the first gaming state, if the display mode of the special display carried over to the first gaming state by the display continuation means is the second display mode, switching to the first display mode during the first gaming state is restricted."

Feature G5. The special display in the predetermined display unit is configured to be always displayed at least in the normal gaming state;
The gaming machine described in feature G2 or feature G3 is characterized in that the display continuation means has a means for continuing the display mode of the special display that was carried over from the first gaming state by the display continuation means until the next transition to the second gaming state.

After the transition to the second gaming state, the special display continues to be restricted from being changed in its display mode until the next transition to the second gaming state. In this way, by configuring the first gaming state so that the player can check the display mode at any time, the effects shown in feature G2 and the like can be effectively achieved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the setting value estimation from changing depending on the time that has passed since the transition to the second gaming state or the number of games played, thereby ensuring fairness between players.

Feature G6. The starting ball entry section has a first ball entry section (lower operating port 62a) and a second ball entry section (right operating port 63a),
The game area is provided with a first flow path (left route) through which the game ball launched into the game area heads toward the first ball entry section, and a second flow path (right route) through which the game ball launched into the game area heads toward the second ball entry section,
In the first gaming state, the game ball is launched into the first flow path, and the transition determination means is configured to have more opportunities for making a determination than the game ball is launched into the second flow path,
A gaming machine as described in feature G3, characterized in that when a ball enters the second entry section in the first game state and the transition determination means determines that the ball entry is a miss, changes to the display mode of the special display based on the miss result are restricted.

In the above configuration, a player who wishes to guess the set value may launch a game ball toward the second flow path even in the first game state. However, launching a game ball toward the second flow path in the first game state may be disadvantageous to the player. As shown in this feature, there is a technical significance in suppressing disadvantages to the player by configuring the display mode of the special display not to change even if such an action results in the ball landing in the second ball entry section and then missing.

When applying features G6 to G10 to feature G2, it is advisable to replace "failure result" with "predetermined event."

Feature G7: The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
The transition determination means is configured to sequentially perform the determination on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are configured to have different probabilities of being a miss result in the transition determination by the transition determination means,
A number of executions storage means (a function of storing the number of games in the RAM 654) for storing the number of executions of a game executed based on a ball entering the second ball entry section during the second game state;
and a number-of-occurrences storage means (a function for storing the number of misses in the RAM 654) for storing the number of occurrences of the misses that have occurred based on the ball entering the second ball entry section during the second game state,
The gaming machine described in feature G6 is characterized in that the display mode changing means is configured to change the display mode of the special display based on the number of executions stored in the execution count memory means and the number of occurrences stored in the occurrence count memory means.

In a configuration in which multiple pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means and transition judgments are made sequentially for the special information, a discrepancy may occur between the timing at which the special information is acquired and the timing at which the judgment is made. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by storing the number of game times executed based on balls entering during the second game state (balls entering the second ball entry section) and the number of misses that occurred based on balls entering during the second game state (balls entering the second ball entry section), and changing the display mode of the special display based on the number of times stored, it is possible to suitably prevent the reliability of the setting value suggestion function by the special display from decreasing due to the above-mentioned discrepancy in timing.

Feature G8. The execution count storage means is configured to store the execution count of a game run based on a ball entering the second ball entry section during the second game state, but not to store the execution count of a game run based on a ball entering the second ball entry section during the first game state;
The gaming machine described in feature G7 is characterized in that the occurrence count memory means is configured to store the number of occurrences of the miss results that occur based on the ball scoring into the second ball scoring section during the second game state, while not storing the number of occurrences of the miss results that occur based on the ball scoring into the second ball scoring section during the first game state.

As shown in feature G8, if the number of play times executed based on a ball entering the second ball entry section during the first game state or the number of misses is not stored, the technical idea shown in feature G6 can be ideally embodied.

Feature G9. The gaming machine described in Feature G7 or Feature G8 is configured such that the information stored in the execution count storage means and the occurrence count storage means is maintained during the first gaming state, and when the second gaming state is next entered, the number of times the game is executed and the number of times a miss occurs in the second gaming state are accumulated in the times stored in the execution count storage means and the occurrence count storage means.

As shown in feature G9, by configuring the number of executions and occurrences to be maintained across the first gaming state and accumulating the number of executions and occurrences, players who favorably expect the reliability of the indication of the setting value from the display mode of the special display can be encouraged to continue playing even after transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

Feature G10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G2 to G9, characterized in that the display mode change means has a means for changing the display mode of the special display when the losing result occurs in the second gaming state.

According to feature G10, if the display mode of the special display is changed when a losing result occurs, it is possible to effectively prevent a losing result from becoming a factor that reduces attention to the game.

The technical ideas shown in Features G4 to G10 may also be applied to Feature G1 above.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features G1 to G10 may be applied to the above Features A to F.

<Feature H Group>
The following feature H group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will be generated, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stopped state on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature H1. A starting ball entry section (operating port 62a, 63a) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a process for determining whether or not a win has been made in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
A game machine having a game round control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display section by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section DL, DR of the main display unit 81) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended,
A setting value determination means (a function of switching the lottery table by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
A set value changing means (a setting change switch attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
A suggestion means for suggesting the setting value determined by the setting value determination means (a function for changing an effect level of the character CA displayed in the character display area CE in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 and a function for executing a first special performance),
The suggestion means is
A first suggestion means (a function of changing an effect level of the character CA in the character display area CE by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143) in which the certainty of the suggestion is relatively low and the execution period of the suggestion is relatively long;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second suggestion means (a function of executing a first special effect in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 143) in which the certainty of the suggestion is relatively high and the execution period of the suggestion is relatively short.

Suggestions with low certainty and long execution periods are advantageous in reducing the chances that the player will miss them. In contrast, suggestions with high certainty and short execution periods are more likely to be missed, but the player will gain more benefit from checking the suggestion. Using these two types of suggestions with different characteristics in combination can increase player satisfaction and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature H2. A starting ball entry section (operating opening 62a, 63a) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a process for determining whether or not a win has been made in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
A game machine having a game round control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display section by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (the operation port display section DL, DR of the main display unit 81) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended,
A setting value determination means (a function of switching the lottery table by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
A set value changing means (a setting change switch attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
A suggestion means for suggesting the setting value determined by the setting value determination means (a function for changing an effect level of the character CA displayed in the character display area CE in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 and a function for executing a first special performance),
The suggestion means includes a first suggestion means having a relatively low probability of suggestion (a function of changing an effect level of the character CA in the character display area CE by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143) and a second suggestion means having a relatively high probability of suggestion (a function of executing a first special performance by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143),
The first suggestion means suggests the setting value at least under a situation where the game operation is not executed by the game control means,
The second suggestion means suggests the setting value under a situation in which the game-play operation is being executed by the game-play control means.

When a player is choosing a machine at an amusement parlor, the suggestion by the first suggestion means can be used as a guide. The suggestion by the first suggestion means has a relatively low degree of certainty, and a more reliable suggestion by the second suggestion means can be expected by actually playing the game. This configuration can increase the satisfaction of players and contribute to increasing interest in the game.

Feature H3. The gaming machine described in Feature H2, wherein the first suggestion means is configured to suggest the setting value at least during the entire or almost entire period of the normal gaming state.

As shown in feature H3, if the suggestion by the first suggestion means can be confirmed during all or almost all of the period during which the game is in the normal game mode, it is possible to effectively prevent the suggestion from being overlooked.

In addition, in pachinko machines, when a special effect is performed for a play round, a large-scale video display may be performed using the entire display screen. The "almost all" configurations shown in this feature are intended to not exclude configurations in which suggestions are temporarily hidden (interrupted) when such effects are performed.

Feature H4. The first suggestion means is configured to suggest the setting value at least during the entire or almost entire period of the normal gaming state;
The gaming machine according to feature H2, wherein the second suggestion means is configured to suggest the setting value only during a specific game round in the normal game state.

As shown in feature H3, if the suggestion by the first suggestion means can be confirmed during all or almost all of the period during which the game is in the normal game mode, it is possible to effectively prevent the suggestion from being overlooked.

In addition, by limiting the game times in which the suggestion by the second suggestion means is executed to specific game times in the normal game state, it is possible to preferably realize the separation of the suggestions by the first suggestion means and the suggestions by the second suggestion means.

Feature H5. A pattern display device (pattern display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a) and capable of displaying a plurality of patterns (pattern rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen;
and a display control means (announcement/performance control device 143 and a display control device 710) for displaying the symbols in a variable manner, and then displaying the symbols in a final stopped state in a pattern combination corresponding to the result of the determination by the transition determination means, and maintaining the final stopped pattern combination for a predetermined period of time.
The first suggestion means and the second suggestion means suggest the setting value by displaying a suggestion image on the display screen (display screen 75a),
A gaming machine described in any one of features H2 to H4, characterized in that the area on the display screen in which the suggestive image is displayed by the second suggestion means is larger than the area on the display screen in which the suggestive image is displayed by the first suggestion means.

In gaming machines having a picture display device, the amount of eye movement required to check a suggestive image during play can be reduced by configuring the display screen of the picture display device to display a suggestive image. However, considering that the display screen is for displaying pictures, it is undesirable for the suggestive image to occupy the variable display area for the picture. In this regard, as shown in this feature, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by making the display area relatively large for suggestive images from the second suggestive means, which has a relatively short display period, to prevent oversight, and by making the display area relatively small for suggestive images from the first suggestive means, which has a relatively long display period, to coexist with the picture.

Feature H6. A pattern display device (pattern display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a) and capable of displaying a plurality of patterns (pattern rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen;
and a display control means (announcement/performance control device 143 and a display control device 710) for displaying the symbols in a variable manner, and then displaying the symbols in a final stopped state in a pattern combination corresponding to the result of the determination by the transition determination means, and maintaining the final stopped pattern combination for a predetermined period of time.
The first suggestion means and the second suggestion means suggest the setting value by displaying a suggestion image on the display screen (display screen 75a),
The first suggestion means displays a suggestion image in a part of the display screen, which is a part of the display screen and is different from a variable display area (variable display area ME) in which the picture is variably displayed (character display area CE),
A gaming machine described in any one of Features H2 to H5, wherein the second suggestion means provides the suggestion in the variable display area.

In gaming machines having a picture display device, by configuring the display screen of the picture display device to display suggestive images, it is possible to reduce the amount of eye movement when checking suggestive images during play, etc. However, considering that the display screen is for displaying pictures, it is undesirable for the suggestive images to occupy the variable picture display area. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by displaying the suggestive images by the second suggestion means, which has a relatively short display period, in the variable picture display area, it is possible to prevent them from being overlooked, and by displaying the suggestive images by the first suggestion means, which has a relatively long display period, outside the variable display area, it is possible to prevent occupancy of the variable display area.

Feature H7. The first suggestion means suggests the setting value by switching a display mode of a suggestion image;
A gaming machine described in any one of features H2 to H6, characterized in that the second suggestion means has a suggestion mode determination means for determining the mode of suggestion by the second suggestion means based on the setting value determined by the setting value determination means and the display mode of the image for suggestion by the first suggestion means.

The configuration is such that the manner of suggestion by the second suggestion means is determined based on the setting value determined by the setting value determination means and the display manner of the image for suggestion by the first suggestion means. By coordinating the first suggestion means and the second suggestion means, the variety of suggestions can be increased and the suggestion function can be prevented from becoming obsolete.

Feature H8. The gaming machine described in Feature H7, characterized in that the suggestion mode determination means is capable of determining the mode of suggestion by the second suggestion means by varying the likelihood of the suggestion by the second suggestion means, and is configured to refer to the display mode of the image for suggestion by the first suggestion means when determining the mode of suggestion.

As shown in feature H8, when determining the mode of suggestion by the second suggestion means, the display mode of the image for suggestion by the first suggestion means is referenced, and the likelihood of the suggestion by the second suggestion means is varied, thereby making it possible to preferably achieve the effect shown in feature H7.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be a gaming machine described in feature H7, characterized in that "the set values include a first set value (e.g., "Setting 1") and a second set value (e.g., "Setting 3") having a higher expected acquisition value than the first set value, the suggestion modes of the first suggestion means include a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode in which the set value is more likely to be selected when the set value is the second set value than the first suggestion mode, and the second suggestion means is configured to determine the suggestion mode of the second suggestion means such that when the suggestion mode of the first suggestion means is the second suggestion mode, the suggestion of the set value by the second suggestion means is more likely than when the suggestion mode of the first suggestion means is the first suggestion mode."

Feature H9. The gaming machine according to Feature H7 or Feature H8, wherein the second suggestion means has a yes/no decision means for deciding whether or not the second suggestion means should suggest the setting value depending on the display mode of the suggestion image by the first suggestion means.

As shown in feature H9, the effect shown in feature H7 can be effectively achieved by configuring the second suggestion means to determine whether or not to make a suggestion by referring to the display mode of the image for suggestion by the first suggestion means when determining the mode of suggestion by the second suggestion means.

Feature H10. The setting value includes a first setting value (e.g., “setting 1”) and a second setting value (e.g., “setting 3”) having a higher expected acquisition value than the first setting value;
A first display mode and a second display mode which is more likely to be selected when the setting value is the second setting value than the first display mode are provided as display modes of the image for suggestion by the first suggestion means,
The gaming machine described in feature H9 is characterized in that the possibility determination means is configured so that the probability of the second suggestion means suggesting the setting value is higher when the suggestion mode by the first suggestion means is the first display mode than when the suggestion mode by the first suggestion means is the second display mode.

When selecting a gaming machine by referring to the suggestions from the first suggestion means, there is a concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine will decrease if the display mode (first display mode) does not suggest a high setting (second setting value). This can be detrimental to the gaming hall. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the machine so that the setting value suggestion from the second suggestion means is more likely to occur when the first display mode is selected than when the second display mode is selected, players who expect a more reliable suggestion from the second suggestion means can be encouraged to play the gaming machine, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

The technical ideas shown in Features H2 to H10 may also be applied to Feature H1 above.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features H1 to H10 may be applied to the above Features A to G.

<Characteristics Group I>
The following feature group I was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will be generated, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stopped state on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature I1. A starting ball entry section (operating port 62a, 63a) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a process for determining whether or not a win has been made in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
A game machine having a game round control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display parts DL, DR by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined display means (the operation port display parts DL, DR of the main display unit 81) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended,
A setting value determination means (a function of switching the lottery table by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a set value changing means (a setting change switch attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means,
A suggestion waiting state transition means (a function of setting a special effect flag in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 143) for transitioning to a suggestion waiting state in which the set value can be suggested based on the establishment of a predetermined waiting condition (a special effect win);
A suggestion means (a function of executing a first special performance in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143) that suggests the setting value determined by the setting value determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (a big win result) after the transition to the suggestion standby state;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an alarm means (a function of changing the color of the effect image EF and displaying the word "WARNING" in the MPU 652 of the alarm/presentation control device 143) that alarms the player in the suggestion waiting state that the setting value will be suggested when the specified execution condition is met.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the setting value, so one of the enjoyments is guessing the setting value while playing. In the configuration shown in this characteristic, a transition to a suggestion waiting state in which a setting value can be suggested is made based on the satisfaction of a predetermined waiting condition, and a setting value is suggested based on the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition after the transition to the suggestion waiting state. When the transition to the suggestion waiting state is made, the player is notified that a setting value will be suggested upon the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition, which can ideally build up anticipation for the suggestion to be executed. In addition, by being notified that preparations for the setting value suggestion are complete, attention to the game is increased, and the player is encouraged to play (continue playing) on the gaming machine.

Feature I2. A starting ball entry section (operating port 62a, 63a) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a process for determining whether or not a win has been made in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
A game machine having a game round control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display parts DL, DR by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined display means (the operation port display parts DL, DR of the main display unit 81) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended,
A setting value determination means (a function of switching the lottery table by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
a set value changing means (a setting change switch attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means,
A suggestion waiting state transition means for transitioning to a suggestion waiting state in which the setting value can be suggested based on the establishment of a predetermined waiting condition (a special performance winning);
A suggestion means (a function of executing a first special performance in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143) that suggests the setting value determined by the setting value determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (a big win result) after the transition to the suggestion standby state;
This gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with an alarm means (a function of changing the effect color and displaying the word "WARNING" in the MPU 652 of the alarm/presentation control device 143) that alarms the player that the game has entered the suggested waiting state when the game has entered the suggested waiting state.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the setting value, so one of the enjoyments is guessing the setting value while playing. In the configuration shown in this characteristic, a transition to a suggestion waiting state in which a setting value can be suggested is made based on the establishment of a predetermined waiting condition, and a setting value is suggested based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition after the transition to the suggestion waiting state. When the transition to the suggestion waiting state is made, the player is notified that the suggestion waiting state is in place, which can appropriately build up anticipation that the suggestion will be executed. In addition, by being notified that preparations for the setting value suggestion are complete, attention to the game is increased, and the player is encouraged to play (continue playing) on the gaming machine.

In addition, the "notification means for notifying the player that the game is in the suggestion waiting state when the game has transitioned to the suggestion waiting state" in this feature can also be changed to "notification means for notifying the player of information corresponding to the fact that the suggestion means will make a suggestion based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition in the suggestion waiting state when the suggestion waiting state is entered by the suggestion waiting state transition means."

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a starting ball entry section (operating port 62a, 63a) provided in the play area (play area PE), and an information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information by MPU 602 of main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on a ball entry into the starting ball entry section;
The present invention provides an acquired information storage means (a function for storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, a transition determination means (a function for executing a process for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information) and a transition corresponding result (a big win result) that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, and a transition corresponding result (a big win result) that changes the game state of the player from the normal game state to the normal game state based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means. and a game round control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display parts DL, DR of the main display unit 81) for controlling a predetermined display means (the operation port display parts DL, DR of the main display unit 81) so that the game round operation is performed, with a game round being counted as one game round from the start of the game round operation to the end of the game round operation by a notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means. The gaming machine has a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of winning game balls, and includes a setting value determination means (a function of switching the lottery table in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining one setting value from among the setting values, a setting value change means (a setting change switch attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determination means, and a suggestion means (a function of executing a first special effect in the MPU 652 of the notification and effect control device 143) for suggesting the setting value determined by the setting value determination means. a suggestion waiting state transition means for transitioning to a suggestion waiting state in which the set value can be suggested based on the satisfaction of a predetermined waiting condition, and a notification means (a function of changing the effect color and displaying the word "WARNING" in the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 143) for notifying a player of information corresponding to a suggestion by the suggestion means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition in the suggestion waiting state when the suggestion waiting state is reached by the suggestion waiting state transition means.

Feature I3. The predetermined execution condition is configured to be satisfied regardless of whether the suggestion standby state is in effect or not,
The gaming machine described in feature I1 or feature I2 is characterized in that the suggestion means is configured not to suggest the setting value when the specified execution condition is met in a situation where the machine has not transitioned to the suggestion waiting state.

By configuring the game so that the specified execution condition can be met even when the game has not yet transitioned to a suggestion waiting state, the relationship between the fulfillment of the specified waiting condition and the fulfillment of the specified execution condition becomes important. With this configuration, the game can be effectively used to increase attention to the game during the process of suggestion generation.

Feature I4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I3, characterized in that if the predetermined execution condition is not satisfied during a game in which the predetermined waiting condition is satisfied, the suggested waiting state can be carried over to a game in which the predetermined waiting condition is satisfied.

As shown in feature I4, by making it possible to carry over the suggested waiting state to a play round following the play round in which the specified waiting condition is met, it is possible to preferably maintain the sense of anticipation for the fulfillment of the specified execution condition.

Feature I5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I4, characterized in that when the suggested standby state is entered by the suggested standby state entry means, the suggested standby state is maintained until the specified execution condition is met.

As shown in feature I5, once a suggestion waiting state is entered, the suggestion waiting state is maintained until a specific execution condition is met, thereby effectively maintaining the player's sense of anticipation.

Feature I6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I4, characterized in that it is equipped with a release means (a function of erasing a special performance flag in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 when a missed super reach occurs) that releases the suggested waiting state when a specified release condition (a missed result corresponding to a super reach) is satisfied before the specified execution condition is satisfied.

According to feature I6, the suggested waiting state is released when a specified release condition is met after the transition to the suggested waiting state. With this configuration, the player aims to achieve a specified execution condition before the specified release condition is met, which adds a sense of tension to the game after the transition to the suggested waiting state.

Feature I7. The gaming machine described in Feature I6, characterized in that the predetermined release condition is configured to be more easily met than the predetermined execution condition.

As shown in feature I7, if the specified execution condition is easier to achieve than the specified release condition, it is possible to prevent excessive occurrence of setting suggestions even if the hurdle for transitioning to the suggestion waiting state is lowered. This configuration increases the opportunities to increase attention to the game by transitioning to the suggestion waiting state, making it a practically preferable configuration.

Feature I8. The suggestion means is configured to suggest the setting value through a special effect (special effect (excluding the result part)) when the predetermined execution condition is established in the suggestion standby state,
The gaming machine described in feature I6 or feature I7, wherein the release means is configured to release the suggestion waiting state via the special effect (special effect (excluding the result part)) when the specified release condition is met in the suggestion waiting state.

According to feature I8, if a specified release condition or a specified execution condition is met during the suggestion waiting state, a special performance will be performed, or the suggestion waiting state will be released. This configuration can dramatically increase the attention of players when a special performance occurs.

Feature I9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I8, characterized in that the predetermined waiting condition and the predetermined execution condition are different in ease of being met.

As shown in feature I9, by creating a difference in the ease with which a specified waiting condition and a specified execution condition can be met, the process leading up to the setting suggestion can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

Feature I10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I9, characterized in that the predetermined waiting condition is configured to be more difficult to achieve than the predetermined execution condition.

If a player enters a suggested waiting state and the suggested waiting state continues for an excessively long time without the specified execution condition being met, this can be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by raising the hurdle for the specified waiting condition to be met while lowering the hurdle for the specified execution condition to be met, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature I11. A starting ball entry section (operating port 62a, 63a) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a process for determining whether or not a win has been made in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
A game machine having a game round control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display parts DL, DR by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined display means (the operation port display parts DL, DR of the main display unit 81) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended,
A setting value determination means (a function of switching the lottery table by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that has multiple setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of the game balls to be acquired and determines one setting value from among the setting values;
A set value changing means (a setting change switch attached to the main control device 162) that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means;
A suggestion means for suggesting the setting value determined by the setting value determination means (a function for executing a first special effect in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 143);
a delay means for delaying the indication of the set value determined by the set value determination means until the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state when a first predetermined condition (winning the lottery) is satisfied and a second predetermined condition (winning the jackpot) is not satisfied in the normal gaming state (a function of holding a special effect flag in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 143 until the jackpot is satisfied);
A gaming machine comprising: a notification means for executing a special notification corresponding to a delay when the suggestion of the set value is delayed by the delay means.

In gaming machines with a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the setting value, so one of the enjoyments is guessing the setting value while playing. In the configuration shown in this characteristic, if a first predetermined condition is met but a second predetermined condition is not met, the suggestion of the setting value is delayed until the second predetermined condition is met. If such a delay occurs, a special notification is executed, which can appropriately build up anticipation that the suggestion will be executed. This increases the attention paid to the game, and encourages the player to play (continue playing) on the gaming machine.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a starting ball entry section (operating port 62a, 63a) provided in the game area (game area PE), and an information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information by MPU 602 of main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on a ball entry into the starting ball entry section;
The information acquisition means includes an acquired information storage means (a function for storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, a transition determination means (a function for executing a process for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information) and a transition determination means (a function for executing a process for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to a winning result) that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, and a transition determination means for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to a winning result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information. and a game round control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display parts DL, DR of the main display unit 81) for controlling a predetermined display means (the operation port display parts DL, DR of the main display unit 81) so that the game round operation is performed, with a game round being counted as one game round from the start of the game round operation to the end of the game round operation by a notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means. The gaming machine has a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) corresponding to the expected value of winning game balls, and includes a setting value determination means (a function of switching the lottery table in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining one setting value from among the setting values, a setting value change means (a setting change switch attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determination means, and a suggestion means (a function of executing a first special effect in the MPU 652 of the notification and effect control device 143) for suggesting the setting value determined by the setting value determination means. It is also possible to provide a gaming machine that includes a restriction means for restricting the suggestion of the setting value by the suggestion means (a function for disabling a first special effect until a special effect flag is set in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 143), and a restriction release means for releasing the restriction by the restriction means when a predetermined restriction release condition is met (a function for setting a special effect flag in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 143), wherein the suggestion means suggests the setting value when a predetermined execution condition is met under a situation in which the restriction has been released by the restriction release means.

Feature I12. The gaming machine described in Feature I11 is characterized in that it is equipped with a cancellation means (a function of erasing a special effect flag in a game round related to a missed result corresponding to a super reach in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 143) that invalidates the establishment of the established first predetermined condition and cancels the delay if a third predetermined condition is established during the delay by the delay means.

According to feature I12, if the third predetermined condition is met after the start of the special notification, the first predetermined condition is invalidated and the delay is cancelled. This configuration allows the player to aim for the second predetermined condition before the third predetermined condition is met, which adds tension to the game after the start of the special notification.

The technical ideas shown in Features I3 to I10 may also be applied to Features I11 to I12 above.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in Features I1 to I12 may be applied to the above Features A to H.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that includes an operating means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by the player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage (such as the guide passage 103 of the guide rail 100) that guides the launched game ball to a specified game area (game area PE), and various game components (nails, etc.) arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section (general winning opening 61, etc.) of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state, in which the variation of the symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the variation of the symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern sequence, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operating means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operating means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 41... Game ball launching handle, 60... Game board, 62... Lower operating ball entry section, 62a... Lower operating port, 63... Right side operating ball entry section, 63a... Right operating port, 64... Upper variable winning device, 65... Lower variable winning device, 75... Pattern display device, 75a... Display screen, 81... Main display unit, 143... Notification and performance control device, 162... Main control device, 602... MPU, 604... RAM, 652... MPU, 653... ROM, 654... RAM, 710... Display control device, CE... Character display area, CA... Character, D... Main display section, DL... Display section for lower operating port, DR... Display section for right operating port, EF... Effect image, ME... Variable display area, PE... Game area.

Claims (1)

A ball entry means provided in the game area;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
an acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a determination means for determining whether to grant a special benefit to a player based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
A means for granting a bonus to a player based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A means for performing the game operation, counting a time when the game operation is started and a notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the judgment means is reached, and the game operation is ended as one game operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific notification means capable of executing a specific notification by a predetermined notification means;
A means for setting a notification mode of the specific notification in accordance with specific information and an expected degree of acquisition of the special benefit ;
A means for setting the specific information to first information upon a predetermined trigger;
a means for setting the specific information to second information different from the first information upon a predetermined trigger;
Equipped with
A configuration capable of differentiating the notification mode of the specific notification set when the specific information is the first information and when the specific information is the second information even if the expected degree of obtaining the privilege is the same, and a configuration capable of differentiating the notification mode of the specific notification when the expected degree of obtaining the privilege is different even if the specific information is the same information,
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the vehicle enters a predetermined state in which a condition for executing the specific notification can be satisfied,
In the predetermined state, when the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the awarding of the benefit and the execution condition is satisfied, the specific notification can be executed;
A gaming machine comprising a means for making a notification corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined state, thereby enabling a player to understand that the predetermined state has occurred.

Images